iR5000/iR6000 REVISION 0 JULY 2000 COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. FY8-13GS-000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Application This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does not apply to your locality. Corrections This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products.
INTRODUCTION 1. Symbols Used This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information: Symbol Description Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning. Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks. Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire). Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems. Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.
INTRODUCTION 2. Outline of the Manual This Service Manual contains basic information needed to service the iR5000/iR6000 and its accessories (i.e., side paper deck, shift tray) in the field, conducted for the purpose of maintaining its product quality and a specific level of performance. A separate Service Manual is made available for each of its accessories (except for the side paper deck and shift tray); for details, refer to the appropriate manual.
INTRODUCTION Chapter 6 Fixing System: Chapter 7 Externals and Controls: Chapter 8 Paper Deck: Chapter 9 Shift Tray: principles of operation of the fixing system, timing of operation, and disassembly/assembly and adjustment principles of operation of the externals/controls, timing of operation, disassembly/assembly and adjustment principles of operation, timing of operation, disassembly/assembly and adjustment principles of operation, timing of operation, disassembly/assembly adjustment 4.
INTRODUCTION The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual: 1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation. represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name In the diagrams, accompanies the symbol , the arrow indicates the direction of the electric signal.
INTRODUCTION System Configuration The iR5000/iR6000 may be configured with the following accessories for a fully integrated system: [3] [4] [5] [2] [1] [6] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Finisher-F1/Saddle Finisher-F2 Copy Tray-C1 Shift Tray-B1 DADF-D1 (standard) Paper Deck-G1 Puncher Unit-B1/C1/D1 Figure 1 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
INTRODUCTION Important! Be sure to turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power plug before starting to disassemble the machine; in addition, keep the following in mind for the work: 1. In printer mode, turning off the main power switch can result in the loss of data being processed. Check to make sure that the Execution/Memory lamp on the control panel is off before operating the main power switch. 2. Do not turn off the main power switch while downloading is taking place.
SYSTEM UNIT COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CONTENTS Contents CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1. Features .......................................... 1-1S 1.0.1 High Speed, High Image Quality ............................... 1-1S 1.0.2 Hard Disk .......................... 1-1S 1.0.3 Stackless, Duplexing Mechanism ......................... 1-1S 1.0.4 Large-Capacity Paper Source ................................ 1-1S 1.0.5 Variety of Delivery Processing (with accessories) ............... 1-1S 2. Specifications .................................. 1-2S 2.
CONTENTS 4.5.1 Shift from Standby Mode (standby → low-power) ... 2-15S 4.5.2 Shift to Standby Mode (low power → standby) ... 2-15S 4.6 Sleep Mode ............................ 2-15S 4.6.1 Shift from Standby Mode (standby → sleep) ............ 2-15S 4.6.2 Shift from Low Power Mode (low power mode → sleep) ................. 2-15S 4.6.3 Return to Standby Mode (sleep → standby) ............ 2-15S 4.7 Off Mode ............................... 2-16S 4.7.1 Shift from Standby Mode (standby → off mode) .....
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1. Features 1.0.1 High Speed, High Image Quality Copying speed: 50 copies/min (iR5000; 1-on-N; from cassette/deck) 60 copies/min (iR6000; 1-on-N; from cassette/deck) Reading resolution: 600 × 600 dpi Printing resolution: 1200* × 600 dpi (copier mode; smoothing ON; varies by model) 2400* × 600 dpi (printer mode) *Equivalent. 1.0.2 Hard Disk The machine comes with a hard disk as standard, enabling memory-based sorting.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2. Specifications 2.1 Copier 2.1.1 Type Item Specifications Body Copyboard Light source Lens Photosensitive medium Console Fixed Xenon tube Lens array (F3.7) Amorphous silicon drum (80-dia.) T01-201-01 2.1.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2.1.3 Functions Item Original type Maximum original size Specifications Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg max.) A3/279.4×431.8 mm (11"×17") Direct 1: 1 Reduce I 1: 0.250 Reduce II 1: 0.500 Reduce III 1: 0.611 Reduce IV 1: 0.707 Reduce V 1: 0.816 Reproduction ratio Reduce IV 1: 0.865 Enlarge I 1: 0.154 Enlarge II 1: 1.224 Enlarge III 1: 0.414 Enlarge IV 1: 2.000 Enlarge V 1: 4.000 Zoom 1: 0.250 to 4.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Pickup Right deck Left deck Paper type 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Manual feed tray Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m ) A4, B5, LTR Tracing paper A4, B5 Colored paper (Canon-recommended) A4 Thick paper (90 to 200 g/m2) A4, B5, LTR Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2) A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R, B5R 279.4×431.8 mm (11" × 17"), LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT (vertical feeding) Tracing paper B4, A4, A4R Colored paper (Canon-recommended) (vertical feeding) (64 to 80 g/m2) A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R, B5R 279.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Item Single-sided Paper type 2 Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m ) A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R, B5R 279.4×431.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Item Auto Double-sided Manual feed tray Paper type • Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2) A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R , B5R 279.4×431.8 mm (11"×17"), LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT (vertical feeding) • Colored paper (Canon-recommended) B4, A4, A4R Thick paper (90 to 200 g/m2) A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, LTR, LTRR • Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2) A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R, B5R 279.4×431.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Item Specifications Claw Tray None 162 mm/16.4 in deep (approx.; about 1500 sheets of 80 g/ Paper deck m2 paper) (right, left) 55 mm/2.2 in deep (approx.; about 550 sheets of 80 g/m2) Cassette 3/4 Delivery tray 250 sheets (approx.; of 80 g/m2) Hard disk 6.4 GB or 5.1 GB*1 Non-image Leading edge Direct/Enlarge-Reduce: 4.0 ± 1.5/-1.0mm < 4.5 ± 1.8mm >*2 width Direct/Enlarge-Reduce: 2.0 ± 1.5mm < 2.0 ± 1.8 mm >*2 Trailing edge Left/right (1st side) Direct/Enlarge-Reduce: 2.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2.1.4 Others Item Temperature Humidity Atmospheric pressure Operating environment 100V (50/60Hz) Power supply 120V (50/60Hz) 220V/60Hz 230V (50/60Hz) Power consumption Noise Maximum Stand by Continuous copying During copying During standby Ozone (after 2500, 000 prints) Width Depth Dimensions Height Weight Copy paper Consumables Toner Specifications 15 to 30°C/59 to 86°F 5% to 80%RH 810.6 to 1013.3 hpa (0.8 to 1.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Reproduction ratio Size Paper size Direct A3 (297×420 mm) A4 (210×297 mm) B4 (257×364 mm) B5 (182×257 mm) A4R (297×210 mm) B5R (257×182 mm) A5R (210×149 mm) A3 A4 B4 B5 A4R B5R A5R Reduce II (50%) III (61.1%) IV (70.7%) V (81.6%) VI (86.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Reproduction ratio Direct Reduce Enlarge Size Paper size 279.4×431.8 mm (11"×17") LTR LGL LTRR STMTR 279.4×431.8 mm (11"×17") LTR LGL LTRR STMTR II (50.0%) III (64.7%) IV (73.3%) V (78.6%) 279.4×431.8 mm (11"×17")→STMTR 279.4×431.8 mm (11"×17")→LTRR 279.4×431.8 mm (11"×17")→LGL LGL→LTRR IV (200.0%) STMTR*→ 279.4×431.8 mm (11"×17") LTRR→ 279.4×431.8 mm (11"×17") LGL→ 279.4×431.8 mm (11"×17") III (129.4%) II (121.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2.2 Paper Deck-G1 Item Pickup Paper accommodation Copy paper type Paper stack Serial number Paper size switch Dimensions Weight Power supply Operating environment Temperature Humidity Atmospheric pressure Specifications Clawless (retard) Side tray • Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2) A4, B5, LTR • Tracing paper (SM-1) A4, B5 • Colored paper (Canon-recommended) A4 Thick paper (90 to 200 g/m2) A4, B5, LTR Height: 385 mm (approx.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2.3 Shift Tray-B1 Item Specifications Paper type Same as host machine Paper size Feeding Same as host machine Shifting LTR, LTRR, LGL, 279.4×431.8 mm (11"×17"), A4, A4R, A3 Height: 60 mm /2.4 in Paper stack (approx.; about 500 sheets of 64 g/m2) Stacking performance Delivery direction 50 mm or less (w/ shift) between stacks: 20 mm or more Shift direction within stack: [between stacks -5] mm (w/ shift) 100 mm or less w/o shift XCSxxxxx Serial number 365.3 (W) × 547.0 (D), 255.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3. Names of Parts 3.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION [3] [1] [7] [2] [9] [5] [8] [4] [6] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Delivery assembly cover Control panel Copyboard glass Feeding assembly releasing lever Service book case [6] [7] [8] [9] Door switch assembly Cassette heater switch Environment switch Leakage breaker F01-301-02 External View 2 1-14 S COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3.2 Cross Section [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [47] [46] [19] [20] [21] [45] [44] [43] [22] [42] [23] [24] [25] [41] [26] [27] [40] [39] [28] [29] [38] [30] [31] [32] [33] [37] [34] [35] [36] F01-302-01 Cross Section COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] ADF reading glass No.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 4. Using the Machine 4.1 Turning On the Power Switches The machine possesses two switches: main power switch and control panel power switch. Normally, it is supplied with power when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in energy saver mode, low power mode, or sleep mode).
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 4.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 4.3 Extension Mode Mode Two-Page Separation Transparency Interleaving Shift Cover/Sheet Insertion Different Size Originals Margin Frame Erase Image Combination Image Separation Nega/Posi Sharpness Mode Memory Recall Booklet Image Repeat Mirror Image Job build Extra-Length Description Use it to copy left and right pages (as of an open book) on separate sheets by a single operation. Use it to insert a sheet of paper between transparencies in transparency mode.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 4.4 User Mode Common Settings copy*/box/other return*, do not return Use it to turn on/off the buzzer. (on*/off; input sound, alarm sound, job end sound) Use it to use Inch input. (on*/off) Inch Entry Drawer Enigibility For APS/ Use it to turn on cassette selection for each cassette folder.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Copier Settings Standard Key 1,2 Setting Use it to register a Preference key on the Basic screen. Select from mode keys and mode memory keys of mode memory on the Extended Mode screen. Use it to automatically rotate images based Auto Orientation on the result of computing original size and reproduction ratio and to copy the resulting images on selected paper.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Use it to fine-adjust any small discrepancy between original and copy images for vertical and horizontal reproduction ratios. (-1.0% to +1.0%; 0.1% increments; 0%*) Use it to clean the pickup roller Feeder Cleaning assembly by feeding paper from the ADF. Use it to clean the charging wire. Wire Cleaning Use it to edge out the staple unit in Saddle Stitcher the saddle stitcher unit. Staple Repositioning Use it to adjust the position of Saddle Stitch Position saddle stitch. (-2.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION System Settings Administrator Info Setteing Machine info Setting Department ID Management Use it to register system administrator data. (control ID: 7 digits; password: 7 digits; administrator name: 32 characters; administrator mail address; administrator contact info; administrator comment) Use it to register a device name and location. Use it to enable/disable* ID control by group. (group ID, ID No.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 5. System Construction 5.
Cassette inside paper level detection PCB DC load • clutch • solenoid • motor • sensor • fan • etc. • Finisher (accessory) Control IC121 IC122 (RAM) (DIMMROM) motor DC load • clutch • solenoid • motor • sensor • etc.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 5.3 Inputs to and Outputs from the Major PCBs 5.3.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 6. Routine Maintenance by the User 6.1 Cleaning Advise the user to clean the following at least once a week: No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Copyboard glass Wire cleaning Feeder cleaning Roller assemblies Sheet assemblies Platen guide White plate (copyboard cover) Read glass Copyboard glass Wipe with a moist cloth; then, dry wipe. Execute ‘wire clean’ in user mode. Execute ‘feeder clean’ in user mode. Wipe with a moist cloth; then, dry wipe. Wipe with a moist cloth; then, dry wipe.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2) Wipe the rollers shown (3 pc. in total) with a moist cloth while turning them; then, wipe them with a dry, soft cloth. Likewise, clean the sheet around them in the same way. F01-601-02 3) Open the C guide, and clean the rollers (5 pc. in total) with a moist cloth while turning he jam removal lever; then, wipe them with a dry, soft cloth. Likewise, clean the sheet around the rollers in the same way. F01-601-03 4) Wipe the rollers (4 pc.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 5) Close the C guide and the feeder cover, and open the ADF. Wipe the copyboard glass with a moist cloth; then, wipe it with a dry, soft cloth. F01-601-05 6) Clean the white plate and the platen guide with a moist cloth. Likewise, clean the sheet around the platen in the same way. At the end, close the ADF. F01-601-06 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 6.2 Inspection Advise the user to check the circuit breaker at least once or twice a month as shown below. 6.2.1 Making a Check 1) Press the test button in the machine’s bottom left. F01-602-01 2) Check to make sure that the open/close lever shifts to OFF and the power turns off. F01-602-02 3) After making the above check, shift the open/close lever to ON. F01-602-03 4) Enter the date in the Breaker Check Sheet found at the back of the User’s Manual.
CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER 1. Basic Operations 1.1 Functional Construction The machine may be divided into the following functional blocks; the controller block is shaded in the diagram: Reader unit Control panel Controller block Main controller PCB Accessory boards Image Processing System Hard disk drive Printer unit F02-101-01 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER 1.2 Outline of Electrical Circuitry 1.2.1 Outline The major mechanism of the controller block are controlled by the CPU on the main controller PCB. The CPU, such ICs as RAM and DIMM used in association with the CPU, and hard disk drive have the following functions: 1.2.2 Main Controller PCB Name CPU RAM Description • Controls image processing of input image data from the reader unit. • Controls image processing of output image data to the printer unit.
CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER Reader unit Control IC6501 panel (CPU) IC1010 (CPU) (DIMM-ROM) Accessory boards (RAM) Main controller PCB Hard disk drive (HDD) Printer unit F02-102-01 major PCBs COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER 1.3 Start-Up Sequence 1.3.1 Outline The system software used to control the machine is stored on the had disk drive (HDD). The CPU on the main controller PCB is programmed to read the system software from the hard disk and write it to the SDRAM mounted to the DIMM socket on the main controller PCB. (For this reason, it will be a while before the control panel becomes ready after the main power switch is turned on.
CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER 1.3.2 Start-Up Sequence When the main power switch is turned on, the CPU on the main controller PCB executes the self-diagnosis program stored in the boot ROM. The self-diagnosis program is designed to check the condition of the SDRAM and hard disk, and indicates any error it detects on the control panel in the form of an error code.
CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER When the self-diagnosis program ends normally, the boot program also stored in the boot ROM starts to read the system software from the hard disk to write it to the system area of the SDRAM. The machine’s system software consists of multiple modules, and the appropriate modules needed at a specific time are called into the system area of the SDRAM for execution.
CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER 1.4 Inputs to and Outputs from the Major PCBs 1.4.
CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER 2. Digital Image Processing 2.1 Outline The machine’s digital image processing and control of the image memory is performed by the main controller PCB.
CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER 2.2 Input Image Processing The input image data from the reader unit is processed as follows: 2.2.1 Image Data from the Reader Unit The image data from the reader unit is 8-bit, 256-gradation luminance signals which have been subjected to shading correction. Further, the input is from two signal lines (odd-/even-number pixels). 2.2.
CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER 2.2.7 Binary Processing (dither screen) The machine’s dither screen method is designed to convert the 8-bit image density signal of film photo mode into a 1-bit image density signal (binary), enabling 144 gradations for binary images (12x12 pixels). 2-10 S COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER 2.3 Controlling the Image Memory The image data resulting from binary processing is processed as follows: 2.3.1 Compression/Decompression, Rotation, Enlargement/Reduction Binary data is processed so that the images may be compressed/decompressed (for electronic sorting), rotated, or enlarged/reduced. 2.3.2 SDRAM The SDRAM is used to temporarily store the image data held by the image memory. 2.3.
CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER 3. Soft Counter The machine is equipped with a soft counter for counting the number of prints. The counter reading is indicated in response to a press on the Check key on the control panel. The counter is controlled by the main control PCB, and the count is incremented when any of the following sensors detects paper during copying/printing operation.
CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER The counter function is set at the factory as follows according to the model of machine: Counter Descriptoin*1 Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 Total (A through L) Total large (ACEGIK) Copy 1 (ABGH) Copy 1 large (AG) Pint 1 total (CDEF) Fax total (1) Default change*2 Default indication 100-V model 120/230-V model ON ON No OFF ON Yes OFF ON Yes OFF ON Yes OFF OFF Yes OFF OFF Yes *1: The notation in parentheses indicates the corresponding counter mode
CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER 4. Controlling the Power Supply 4.1 Outline The main controller PCB controls the following five power modes, in addition to the mode it controls at when the main power switch is turned off (power-off mode): • standby mode (normal operation) • power save mode • low-power mode • sleep mode • off mode 4.2 Power Supply Mode The machine possesses the following five modes for each of its power supplies: +3.3V all-night (3.3 VB), +3.3 V non-all night (3.
CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER 4.5 Low Power Mode In low power mode, only the +24-V power supply remains off; the level of power consumption for the reader unit and the printer unit is reduced for low power consumption. 4.5.1 Shift from Standby Mode (standby → low-power) A shift is made from standby mode to low power mode under the following conditions: • Low power mode is selected on the control panel. • Standby mode has continued for a specific period of time, selected in user mode. 4.5.
CHAPTER 2 MAIN CONTROLLER 4.7 Off Mode In off mode, a minimum number of logic circuits on the main controller PCB are left powered, and all others including the CPU (+3.3 V) all night power supply are tuned off. This mode is used only when the copier is used on its own (i.e., without network print option/PDL print option). 4.7.1 Shift from Standby Mode (standby → off mode) A shift is made from standby mode to off mode under the following conditions: • The control panel power switch (soft switch) is off.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 1. Selecting the Site The site must satisfy the following conditions; if possible, pay a visit before the delivery of the machine: 1. The temperature must be between 75° and 32.5°C (59° and 86°F) and the humidity must be between 5% and 85%. Avoid an area near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier, or refrigerator. 2. Avoid an area near a source of fire or subject to dust or ammonium gas. If the site is exposed to direct sunlight, provide a curtain. 3.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 7. If multiple machines exist, be sure to arrange them so that the exhaust from one will not be drawn into another. In general, the silicone gas (vaporized silicone oil from the fixing assembly) will soil corona wires, shortening their lives. This phenomenon is particularly conspicuous in a low humidity environment. Ventilation Wrong 1 Wrong 2 F03-100-02 3-2 S F03-100-03 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 2. Unpacking and Installation 2.1 Before Starting the Work Be sure to observe the following when installing the machine: 1. If the machine is moved from a cold to warm place for installation, condensation can occur in its pickup/feed assembly. Leave the machine alone without unpacking for an hour or more before starting the work. (The term condensation refers to the formation of droplets of water on a metal surface caused by rapidly cooling moisture in the air.) 2.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 2.2 Installation Install the machine as follows; for details, see the appropriate item on the pages that follow: 1. Unpacking unpacking, checking the attachments 2. Mounting the Scanner removing the scanner fixing screws/spacers 3. Mounting the Fixing assembly removing the separation claw releasing member, removing the fixing assembly nip releasing screws 4. Checking the Charging Assemblies checking the transfer/separation, primary, and pre-transfer charging assemblies 5.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 2.3 Unpacking Step Work 1 Unpack the machine, and remove the plastic sheets. Do not remove the tape used to secure the two adjusters found on the machine’s bottom (front) until the machine has been moved off the skids. Otherwise, the adjusters can trip on the slope plates, causing the machine to tumble. 2 Checks/remarks Adjusters Insert the grip that comes with the machine into the front of the pickup side. Be sure to orient the stopper as shown when inserting it.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Checks/remarks Step Work 5 Holding the two grips (front, rear) on the side of the pickup assembly, lift the machine slightly to remove the pad. 6 Turn over the slope plates; then match the pin holes in the skids with those in the slope plates, and fit the pins (one each). Holding the grips (front, rear) found on the machine, move the machine off the skid by sliding it on the slope plates. 7 8 Remove the packaging tape from the body.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 2.5 Mounting the Fixing Assembly Step Work 1 Open the front cover. 2 Shift the fixing/feeding assembly releasing lever in the direction of the arrow (left) to free the transfer/separation charging assembly. Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly to the front. Checks/remarks Fixing/feeding assembly Releasing lever 3 Remove the separation claw releasing member and the tag from the fixing/feeding assembly.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Work Step 5 Remove the two fixing nip releasing screws. Checks/remarks Screw (rear) Screw (front) 6 3-8 S Close the fixing/feeding assembly. COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 2.6 Checking the Charging Assemblies Work Step 1 Remove the two screws, and detach the feeding assembly front cover (right). Checks/remarks Screws Feeding assembly front cover 2 Remove the screw, and detach the metal fixing; then disconnect the connector. While holding the front and the rear of the transfer/separation charging assembly at the same time, pull it to the front to detach in the left upper direction.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step Work 5 Open the hopper cover, and remove the three screws and connector cover; then disconnect the connector. Checks/remarks Hopper assembly Screw Hopper cover Connector cover 6 Slide out the hopper unit to the front, and turn it to the front right by 90°. 7 Loosen the screw; then shift the charging assembly fixing member in the direction of the arrow (right upper), and secure it in place with a screw. Disconnect the connector, and take out the primary charging assembly.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step Work Checks/remarks 9 Insert the primary charging assembly and pre-transfer charging assembly; then secure them in place. 1. If solvent was used for cleaning, check to make sure that it has evaporated completely. 2. When inserting the pre-transfer charging assembly, be sure to push it in horizontally in relation to the processing unit, thus avoiding damage to the surface of the drum. 3.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 2.7 Mounting the Developing Assembly Work Step 1 Open the manual feed tray cover and remove the screw from the door tape. Checks/remarks Screw 2 Remove the screw and slide the developing assembly locking unit in the direction of the arrow (rear) to detach. Screw 3 4 Take out the developing assembly from the card- Turn the developing cylinder board box. gear by hand and check to make sure that the cylinder is free of scratches.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 2.8 Mounting the Pickup Assembly Step Work 1 Open the right upper cover and remove the pickup roller releasing spacer. Checks/remarks Spacer Slide the pickup roller releasing spacer to the right; then pull it out to the front. Spacer 2 Slide out the right deck and the cassette halfway and open the right upper cover and right lower cover; then remove the pickup roller releasing spacers of the right deck and cassette 3/4.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 2.9 Mounting the Deck Locking Plate (left deck) Work Step 1 Push the releasing button of the left deck, and slide out the left deck. 2 Fit the deck locking plate with a screw. Close the left deck. 3-14 S Checks/remarks Deck locking plate Screw COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 2.10 Supplying Toner Work Step 1 Rotate the toner bottom as shown ten times or more. 2 3 Checks/remarks Open the hopper cover and fit the boss on the tip Check to make sure that the toner of the toner bottle in the groove of the toner sup- bottle is locked to the toner supply mouth. ply mouth. At this time, be sure to push it in until a click is heard. Pull the shutter (black) of the body (found on the right of the toner supply mouth of the hopper) to the right.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 2.11 Setting the Cassette Step Work 1 Push the cassette releasing button, and slide out each cassette to the front; then remove the packing materials. 2 Set the side plate of each cassette to the hole identified by the marking M (M4/A3). Fit the Inch-preventing roll that comes with the machine from inside the cassette so that it covers the hole (STMT-R) identified by the marking A and the one (LTR-R) identified by the marking H. • Be sure there is no gap.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 2.12 Changing the Paper Size for the Front Deck (right/left) Step Work 1 Press the release button and slide out the deck. 2 Remove the screw from the rear edge guide plate and the left and right guide plates; then secure each guide plate to suit the size of the user’s choice. At time of shipment: A4 3 4 Checks/remarks Rear end guide plate Right guide plate Screw Left guide plate Slide the deck into the maScrews chine.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 2.13 Checking Images/Operations and User Mode Be sure to remove all packaging material from the cassettes before turning on the power switch. Checks/remarks Step Work 1 Slide out the duplexing unit and check to make sure that there is no foreign matter and each part is free of damage. 2 Connect the power plug to the power outlet and turn on the power switch.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Checks/remarks Work Step 5 When the developing assembly has been supplied with toner, check the operator and copy images using the Test Sheet by making sure of the following: Copying operation: All associated operations must be normal. Double-sided copying: Paper must move properly in the duplexing unit. Pickup operation: Paper must be picked up normally from each source of paper. Operating noise: There must be no abnormal noise.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 2.14 Checking the Environment Switch Step Work 1 The environment of the site determines how the environment switch must be used. If the site requires that the drum/cassette heater remain on while the main power switch is turned off, operate the following two switches: Environment Switch It is designed for the drum heater and all night heaters, and functions as follows: ON: all night switch remains on; the main power supply switch may be off or on.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 2.15 Installing the Machine Work Step 1 Remove the two screws, and detach the cover from the right rear bottom of the machine; then, store the following parts: Checks/remarks Drum tool 1. drum protection sheet; keep it near the waste toner case. 2. drum rotating tool; put it together with the waste toner case cap and store it in the grip found at the top of the waste toner case. 3. grip; store it in the grip recess. Do not roll the drum protection sheet.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 3. Relocating the Machine Be sure to observe the following if the machine needs to be moved by truck or other means of transportation: Work Procedure 1. Remove all paper from the left/right paper deck and the cassettes. 2. Turn off the power switch, and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet. 3. Secure the No. 1 mirror base in place from the side of the reader left cover using a fixing screw (check to make sure that the No. 1 mirror base will not move). 4.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 4. Mounting the Delivery Roll The delivery roller must be equipped with a delivery roll in its middle before mounting the delivery tray. The following steps, however, must not be performed if installation of the shift tray or finisher is planned. Step Work 1 Open the front cover, and slide out the fixing/ feeding assembly; then remove the two screws, and detach the anti-wrap cover.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 5. Mounting the Original Holder Step Work 1 Mount the original holder to the machine (right) using the two stepped screws that come with the machine. If the original holder is not needed, fit the two rubber caps that come with the machine instead. If it is difficult to mount the original holder, try loosening the two mounting screws. 3-24 S Checks/remarks Stepped screws Original holder COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 6. Installing the Control Card IV Step Work 1 Remove the three screws and detach the upper cover. 2 Remove the screw and detach the upper cover support plate. 3 Shift the screw hole position so that the control card base is more or less outside the machine; then mount the upper cover support plate. Checks/remarks [1] [2] 4 5 Mount the Control Card IV to the upper cover support plate with one screw.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION 7. Installing the NE Controller-A1 Installation herein is to the iR5000/6000. For how to make various settings and points to note and check (operations), see the Installation Procedure that comes with the machine. 7.1 Installation Work Step 1 Remove the upper cover of the controller. (See the Installation Procedure.) 2 Connect the plug of the AC adapter to the controller. (See the Installation Procedure.
CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION Step Work 5 Mount the rear upper cover, and draw out the controller cable [4] from where the controller is mounted; then, connect it to the controller cable [5]. Checks/remarks [5] 6 Mount the controller [6] to the rear upper cover using four screws [7]. (Use the screws that come in the box.) [4] [6] [7] 7 Make various settings and check the operations as instructed in the NE Controller-A1 Installation Procedure. COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
READER UNIT COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CONTENTS Contents CHAPTER 1 BASIC OPERATION 1. Functional Construction ................ 1-1R 2. Outline of Electrical Circuitry ....... 1-2R 2.1 Outline .................................... 1-2R 2.2 Reader Controller PCB ........... 1-2R 3. Basic Sequence of Operations ....... 1-3R 3.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On ............................ 1-3R 3.2 Basic Sequence of Operations in Book Mode ......................... 1-3R 4. Inputs to and Outputs from the Major PCBs ..........................
CONTENTS 6.2.1 Removing the Scanner System Drive Cable ........ 2-19R 6.2.2 Routing the Scanner Drive Cable ..................... 2-21R 6.2.3 Positioning the No. 1/2 Mirror Base ..................... 2-22R 7. Others .......................................... 2-24R 7.1 Removing the Original Size Sensor ................................... 2-24R 7.2 Removing the HP Sensor ...... 2-25R 7.3 Removing the Copyboard Sensor ................................... 2-26R 8. PCBs ........................................
CHAPTER 1 BASIC OPERATION COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 1 BASIC OPERATION 1. Functional Construction The reader unit is divided into the following two functional blocks (shaded): 1. Original exposure block 2. Control block Original Original illumination Optical path Reader controller PCB [Control Block] Controller unit CCD/AP PCB [Original Exposure Block] Printer unit F01-100-01 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 1 BASIC OPERATION 2. Outline of Electrical Circuitry 2.1 Outline The major mechanisms of the reader unit are controlled by the CPU on the reader controller PCB. The functions of the major ICs are as indicated in the following table. 2.2 Reader Controller PCB Name CPU Description • Controls the scanning lamp. • Controls the sequence of scanner • Controls shading correction. operations. • Controls the original size detection • Controls service mode. • Controls the communications with mechanism.
CHAPTER 1 BASIC OPERATION 3. Basic Sequence of Operations 3.1 Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On Power switch ON STBY SREADY Scanner HP sensor (PS39) Scanning lamp (LA2) Scanner motor (M3) *1 *2 Forward Reverse *1: Shading correction (gain adjustment) is executed 1 sec after the scanning lamp turns on. *2: Shading correction (CCD original size detection slash level adjustment) is executed 100 secs after the scanning lamp turns on. F01-301-01 3.
CHAPTER 1 BASIC OPERATION 4. Inputs to and Outputs from the Major PCBs 4.1 Wiring of Major PCBs J5004 DC controller PCB Controller unit Reader controller PCB CCD/AP PCB J5003 J6002 Scanner motor J5011 M3 Inverter PCB J5007 J5101 Note: The symbol in the diagram indicates the major wiring route, NOT the flow of signals. F01-401-01 Wiring of Major PCBs 1-4 R COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.
CHAPTER 1 BASIC OPERATION 4.2 Inputs to and Outputs from the Reader Controller PCB • Inputs to and Outputs from the Reader Controller PCB (1/2) Reader controller PCB Scanner HP sensor Copyboard cover sensor Original sensor PS39 J5057 -1 -2 -3 J5052 -3 -6 -2 -5 -1 -4 J5012 +5V -3 -2 HPSENS -1 PS40 J5056 -1 -2 -3 J5051 -6 -1 -5 -2 -4 -3 J5012 +5V -6 -5 ADF_OPEN* When the copyboard cover is closed, '1'.
CHAPTER 1 BASIC OPERATION • Inputs to and Outputs from the Reader Controller PCB (2/2) Reader controller PCB J5010 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 To ADF GND +24V GND ADF_RX ADF_TX ADF_ITOP* GND See the ADF Service Manual. J5005 -1 +24V -2 GND +24V GND -3 -4 -1 -2 Printer unit DC power supply PCB J8500 J5105 To ADF connector F01-402-02 1-6 R COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 1. Outline of Operations 1.1 Outline The major functions of the original exposure system are as follows: Item Scanning lamp Original Scanning Scanner position detection Reproduction ratio (zoom) Scanner drive control Lens Scanning lamp activation Original size detection Description Xenon lamp In book mode: by moving the scanner. With ADF in use: by stream reading while holding the No. 1 mirror base fixed in position.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM The major components of the original exposure system are as follows: Image leading Stream reading position edge HP (start position) Original Copyboard glass No. 2 mirror No. 1 mirror base Lens No. 1 mirror Scanning lamp CCD No. 2 mirror No. 3 mirror base F02-101-01 Scanner motor (M3) Scanner HP sensor (PS39) Scanning lamp (LA2) Light-blocking plate Copyboard cover sensor (PS40) (forward) (reverse) No. 1 mirror base No.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 1.2 Sequence of Operations (original exposure) 1.2.1 Book Mode, 1 Original, Copyboard Closed Copyboard cover opens Copyboard cover closes Start key ON SCFW SREADY STBY SCRV STBY Copyboard cover sensor (PS40) Scanner HP sensor (PS39) Scanning lamp (LA2) Scanner motor (M3) Forward Reverse *1 Point of original size detection *2 Start position HP Start position *1: original size detection.*2: shading correction.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 1.2.2 Book Mode, 1 Original, Copyboard Cover Open Copyboard cover open Start key ON SCFW SREADY STBY STBY SCRV Copyboard cover sensor (PS40) Scanner HP sensor (PS39) Scanning lamp (LA2) Forward Scanner motor (M3) Reverse *1 *2 Start position Point of original size detection Point of original size detection Start position *1: original size detection.*2: shading correction.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 1.3 Enlargement/Reduction (zoom) [1] When the copyboard cover is used, the ratio may be between 25% and 400% and the speed of the scanner is controlled. [2] When the ADF is used, the ratio may be between 25% and 200% and the speed of moving the originals is controlled. 1.3.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 2. Scanner Drive System 2.1 Outline The following parts are associated with the scanner drive system. Scanner motor (M3) [1] Reader controller PCB Drive signal Scanner HP Light-blocking plate [2] sensor (PS39) (forward) [3] (reverse) No. 1 mirror base Copyboard cover sensor (PS40) No. 2 mirror base F02-201-01 [1] Scanner Motor (M3) Control Signal Used to turn on/off the motor and to control its direction and speed of rotation.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 2.2 Controlling the Scanner Motor The system used to control the scanner motor is constructed as follows: The motor driver turns on/off the scanner motor and controls its direction and speed of rotation in keeping with the signals from the CPU, IPC, and speed control circuit. Reader controller PCB +24V A CPU J5011 Scanner motor 1 M3 5 Motor driver A* 2 B 3 6 IPC B* 4 Speed control circuit F02-202-01 2.2.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 2.2.2 Reversing the Scanner After Scanning in Main Reading Direction When the image has been scanned, the No. 1 mirror base is moved in reverse to home position at the speed used for 50% reduction, regardless of the ratio being used. E202 (HP detection error) [1] The No. 1 mirror base does not reach the HP sensor within a specific period of time. [2] The HP sensor identifies the presence of the No. 1 mirror base when the No. 1 mirror base should have been moved away.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3. Controlling the Scanning Lamp (LA2) 3.1 Outline The system used to control the scanning lamp is constructed as follows and the items of control include the following: [1] Turning on and off the scanning lamp. [2] Monitoring the scanning lamp for errors. Inverter PCB Xenon lamp Activation control circuit LA2 J5101 J5007 Reader controller +24V PCB 1 LAMP_ON 5 3 3 CPU INV_ERR 4 2 2 4 F02-301-01 3.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3.4 Detecting an Error The reader controller circuit generates the error signal (INV_ERR) in response to an error (e.g., output open, short circuit, leak) in the inverter circuit. A fault in the lamp (low intensity, activation failure) will be identified as an activation error caused by lack of intensity during initial activation (e.g., at time of shading correction). E220 It is used to indicate a fault in the inverter PCB.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 4. Detecting the Size of Originals 4.1 Outline The machine automatically identifies the size of originals based on the combination of intensities measured by reflection type sensors and CCD at specific points. • For main scanning direction, the CCD is used to take measurements (if AB, 4 points; if Inch, 2 points). • For sub scanning direction, a reflection type photosensor is used (1 point). 4.2 Points of Detection For main scanning direction, the No.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 4.4 Outline of Detection Operation 4.4.1 Book Mode, 1 Original, Copyboard Cover Open Xenon lamp Original sensor Point of original detection 1 Point of original detection 2 Point of original detection 3 Point of original detection 4 Copyboard glass Copyboard cover Reader unit [1] The scanner remains in wait. No. 1 mirror base: at HP Xenon lamp: off Original sensor: disabled Point of original detection [2] The copyboard is opened.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM AB-Configuration Originals size Inch-Configuration Point of CCD detection 1 2 3 4 Original Originals Point of CCD detection sensor size A3 11"×17" B4 A4R LGL LTRR A4 LTR B5 B5R None 1 : reflection present None Originals 2 sensor : reflection absent T02-404-01 4.4.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM [4] The copyboard cover is closed. When the copyboard cover is brought down to 25°, the Copyboard cover sensor detects the “closed” state, and original size detection starts. For main scanning direction, the xenon lamp is turned on, and the CCD checks for reflected light (4 points). For sub scanning direction, the original sensor starts detection. 25˚ [5] The copyboard cover is fully closed.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 5. Scanning Lamp 5.1 Removing the Scanning Lamp 1) Remove the copyboard glass. 2) Remove the right upper cover and the right upper cover base. 3) Remove the reader left cover; then, detach the reader front cover. 4) Remove the reader controller PCB. 5) Move the No. 1 mirror base [1] as far as the cut-in made in the frame. 6) Remove the three screws [2] from the No. 1 mirror base, and detach the scanning lamp [3] together with the cable fixing plate [4].
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM When mounting the scanning lamp, be sure to hook the cable [9] on the pulley [11] of the No. 2 mirror base [10] without twisting it. [11] [9] [10] F02-501-03 5.2 Points to Note When Replacing the Scanning Lamp Do not work while the scanning lamp is hot. Do not leave fingerprints on the surface of the scanning lamp. If the surface of the scanning lamp is soiled, dry wipe it. Do not touch the light window of the scanning lamp, as when mounting it.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 6. Scanner Drive Block 6.1 Scanner Motor 6.1.1 Removing the Scanner Motor [2] 1) Remove the right upper cover and the right upper cover base. 2) Remove the reader controller. 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the ADF base (right) [2]. 4) Remove the five screws [3], and detach the motor cover [4].
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 6.1.2 Mounting the Scanner Motor 1) Attach the belt [3] to the pulley [2] of the scanner motor [1]. 2) Fit the motor base to its position, fit the two springs to provide tension to the belt; then, secure it in place with three screws. [1] [2] [3] F02-601-04 2-18 R COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 6.2 Scanner System Drive Cable 6.2.1 Removing the Scanner System Drive Cable Obtain the following before starting to replace the scanner drive cable: • 1) 2) 3) mirror positioning tool (FY9-3040-000) Remove the ADF. Remove the copyboard glass. Remove the reader left cover and the reader front cover. 4) Remove the motor cover. (See steps 1) through 4) used to the motor.) 5) Remove the five screws [1], and detach the PCB base [2].
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 8) Remove the two cable fixing screws [11] of the No. 1 mirror base [10]. 9) Remove the two springs [12] used to secure the cable in place. 10) Remove the cable fixing plate [13] and each pulley cable. [11] [10] [11] [13] [12] F02-602-04 2-20 R COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 6.2.2 Routing the Scanner Drive Cable Route the scanner cable to each pulley and hook mirror base in the order indicated: 1) Loosen the screw on the cable fixing plate. 2) Fit the ball of the cable into the hole of the drive pulley, and wind the cable (4 times inward, 5 times outward); then, tape it in place. When winding, be sure that the cable metal fixing is inside.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM When mounting the reader upper frame, be sure to go through the following steps: [2] [1] 1) Fit the eight claws [1] of the reader frame correctly into the cut-offs in the reader upper frame. 2) Secure the positions [2] of the four left/ right claws using screws. 3) Fit the two screws [3] at the end. [1] [3] [1] [1] F02-602-06 6.2.3 Positioning the No. 1/2 Mirror Base 1) Set the pins of the mirror position tool as indicated.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 2) Insert the pins of the mirror positioning tool (front [2]/rear [3]) into each of the holes [1]: No. 1 mirror base, No. 2 mirror base, and rail. The position of the No. 2 mirror base is adjusted by sliding the cable fixing plate to the front and the rear. [2] [1] F02-602-08 [3] [1] F02-602-09 3) Secure the end of the cable so far temporarily fixed to the hook of the reader frame using a spring. 4) Fully tighten the screw on the cable fixing plate.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 7. Others 7.1 Removing the Original Size Sensor 1) Remove the copyboard glass. 2) Move the No. 1 mirror base to the left end. 3) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, free the cable from the cable clamp [3], and detach the original sensor unit [4]. [4] [1] [5] [3] [2] F02-701-01 When removing the original sensor, take care not to damage it against the cable [5]. 2-24 R COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 7.2 Removing the HP Sensor 1) Remove the ADF unit from the reader unit. 2) Remove the reader rear cover. 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the ADF base (left) [2]. 4) Remove the three screws [3], and detach the fuse base [4]. [2] [1] [3] [4] F02-702-01 5) Remove the screw [5], and detach the sensor base [7]; then, disconnect the connector [8], and detach the HP sensor [8] from the base. [7] [5] [8] [6] F02-702-02 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 7.3 Removing the Copyboard Sensor 1) Remove the reader rear cover. 2) Remove the three screws [1], and detach the fuse PCB base [2]. [1] [2] F02-703-01 3) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the screw [4]; then, detach the copyboard sensor cover [7] and the copyboard sensor [6]. [5] [3] [4] [6] F02-703-02 2-26 R COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 8. PCBs 8.1 Removing the Fuse PCB 1) Remove the reader rear cover. 2) Remove the three screws [1], and detach the fuse PCB [2]. 3) Remove the screw [3], and disconnect the three connectors [4]; then, detach the fuse PCB [5]. [4] [4] [5] [3] [4] F02-801-01 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM 8.2 Removing the Inverter PCB 1) Remove the right upper cover and the right upper cover base. 2) Remove the reader controller PCB. 3) Disconnect the two connectors from the inverter PCB [1]. [1] [2] [2] F02-802-01 4) Remove the three screws [3], and detach the stopper [4]; then, pull out the inverter unit [5]. [5] [4] [3] F02-802-02 5) Remove the two screws [7], and disconnect the connector [7]; then, detach the inverter PCB [8].
CHAPTER 2 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM Points to Note When Mounting the Inverter PCB When fitting the inverter PCB [1] into the reader frame, be sure to fit the leading edge [2] of the frame of the inverter PCB into the mounting hole in the reader frame. [2] [1] F02-802-04 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 1. Outline The major functions of the image processing system are as follows: [1] CCD (image sensor) Number of lines: 1 Number of pixels: 7450 Size of pixel: 4.7 x 4.7 µm [2] Shading Correction Shading adjustment: executed in service mode Shading correction: executed for each copy [3] Auto Density Adjustment (AE) Executed for each line in main scanning direction.
CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 2. Analog Image Processing 2.1 Outline Analog image processing is performed by the CCD/AP PCB, which has the following major functions: [1] Drives the CCD. [2] Corrects the gain in the CCD output, corrects offset. [3] Performs A/D conversion of CCD output.
CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 2.3 Gain Correction and Offset Correction of the CCD Output To correct discrepancies in the efficiency of photoconversion among pixels, the analog video signals from the CCD are corrected: in gain correction, the rates of amplification are standardized; in offset correction, on the other hand, the output voltage in the absence of incoming light is set to a specific level. 2.
CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 3. Digital Image Processing 3.
CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 3.2.2 Shading Adjustment In this adjustment, the density of white paper and that of the standard white plate are measured, and the results are stored in memory. The data is computed for use as the target level during shading correction. The adjustment is designed for service mode and is used upon installation of the machine, after replacement of the scanning lamp, or when correcting changes in the intensity of the scanning lamp occurring over time. 3.2.
CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 3.2.4 Edge Gain Correction (ADF in use) In stream reading with the ADF in use, the No. 1 mirror base is fixed in position. To check for changes in the intensity of the scanning lamp, the edge gain correction plate (gray; mounted at the edge of read position) is read, and a gain that enables the attainment of a specific intensity is computed. The result is used to correct the data which otherwise would be affected by changes in the intensity of light.
CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 3.3 Auto Density Adjustment (AE) 3.3.1 Outline As in the case of a newspaper, some originals have a dark background. Auto density correction is executed to reproduce the information (text, graphics) of such originals by removing the background. This adjustment is enabled in density auto mode or when text mode is selected and data is processed by the ABC circuit. 3.3.
CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 3.4 Related Service Mode COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ (shading auto adjustment) Execute the mode after replacing the CCD unit, scanning lamp, reader controller PCB, or standard white plate.
CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 4. External Covers 4.1 Removing the Reader Front Cover 1) Remove the two screws [1], and remove the reader right cover [2]; then, detach the copyboard glass [3]. [1] [3] [2] F03-401-01 2) Open the hopper cover [4], and remove the three screws [5]; then, detach the right upper cover [6]. [6] [4] [5] F03-401-02 3) Remove the four screws [7], and detach the right upper cover base [9] together with the card controller base [9] and the copyboard base [10].
CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 4) Remove the two screws [11], and detach tje reader left cover [12]; then, remove the two screws [13], and detach tje reader front cover [14]. [11] [14] [12] [13] F03-401-04 3-10 R COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 4.2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 1) Remove the five screws [1], and detach the rear cover [2]. [1] [1] [2] F03-402-01 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 5. CCD/AP PCB 5.1 Removing the CCD Unit 1) Remove the reader right cover, and detach the copyboard glass. 2) Move the No. 1 mirror base to the left end. 3) Remove the right upper cover and the right upper cover base. 4) Remove the reader left cover and the reader front cover. 5) Remove the eight screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach tje CCD shielding plate [3].
CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 5.2 When Replacing the CCD/AP PCB Be sure to execute ‘CCD auto adjustment’ in service mode, and record the updated CCD adjustment data on the service label. 1. CCD Auto Adjustment COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD >CCD-ADJ 2. CCD Adjustment data all items under COPIER>ADJUST>CCD COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 3 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM 6. Reader Controller PCB 6.1 Removing the Reader Controller PCB 1) Remove the reader rear cover. 2) Disconnect tje nine connectors, and remove the flat cable [1], seven screws [2], and cable guide [3]; then, detach the reader controller PCB [4]. [2] [1] [4] [2] [2] [3] Take care not to damage the flat cable removed in step 2). [2] F03-601-01 6.2 When Replacing the Reader Controller PCB See the Troubleshooting Manual: Chap.3>7. Electrical Parts.
PRINTER UNIT COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CONTENTS Contents CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1. Safety .............................................. 1-1P 1.1 Safety of Laser Light ............... 1-1P 1.2 Regulations Under the Center for Devices and Radiological Health ....................................... 1-1P 1.3 Handling the Laser Unit ........... 1-3P 1.4 Safety of Toner ......................... 1-6P 2. Image Formation ............................. 1-7P 2.1 Outline ......................................
CONTENTS CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 1. Outline of Processes ....................... 4-1P 1.1 Outline ..................................... 4-1P 1.2 Basic Sequence of Operations (image formation system) ......... 4-3P 2. Potential Control ............................. 4-5P 2.1 Outline ...................................... 4-5P 2.1.1 Controlling Potential for Printing/Copying ................ 4-6P 2.2 Determining Primary Current ................................... 4-11P 2.
CONTENTS 7.2.1 Removing the Drum Unit .................................. 4-51P 7.2.2 Replacing the Drum Heater ............................... 4-52P 7.2.3 Mounting the Photosensitive Drum ................................ 4-53P 7.2.4 Setting the DIP Switch for the Drum Heater Control PCB .................... 4-53P 7.3 Process Unit ........................... 4-54P 7.3.1 Removing the Process Unit .................................. 4-54P 7.3.2 Mounting the Process Unit ..................................
CONTENTS CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 1. Outline ............................................ 5-1P 1.1 Specifications and Construction ............................. 5-1P 1.2 Arrangement of Roller and Sensors ..................................... 5-2P 2. Pickup Assembly ............................ 5-4P 2.1 Pickup Control System ............. 5-4P 2.1.1 Outline ............................... 5-6P 2.1.2 Sequence of Operations (pickup) .............................. 5-7P 2.1.3 Pickup Retry Operation ....
CONTENTS 9.1.6 Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation Roller ........ 5-51P 9.1.7 Removing the Manual feed Tray Paper Sensor ............ 5-52P 9.1.8 Attaching the Side Guide Timing Belt in the Manual Feed Tray Assembly ........ 5-53P 9.1.9 Removing the Manual Feed Pull-Out Roller ........ 5-53P 9.2 Deck Pickup Assembly .......... 5-54P 9.2.1 Removing the Right Deck Pickup Assembly ............. 5-54P 9.2.2 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Assembly ............. 5-54P 9.2.
CONTENTS 9.6.11 Removing the Reversal Sensor 2 ........................... 5-75P 9.6.12 Removing the Left Deck Feed Paper Sensor ........... 5-76P 9.6.13 Removing the Horizontal Registration Sensor .......... 5-77P 9.6.14 Removing the Duplex Driver PCB ...................... 5-77P 9.6.15 Removing the Horizontal Registration Unit .............. 5-78P 9.6.16 Removing the Duplex Feeding Fan ..................... 5-78P 9.6.17 Mounting the Reversing Flapper Solenoid ..............
CONTENTS 4.5.2 Removing the Lower Separation Claw ............... 6-35P 4.6 Delivery Assembly ................. 6-36P 4.6.1 Removing the External Delivery Roller ................. 6-36P 4.6.2 Removing the Internal Delivery Roller ................. 6-37P 4.6.3 Adjusting the Position of the Delivery Flapper Solenoid (SL5) ................. 6-38P 4.7 Paper Sensor .......................... 6-39P 4.7.1 Removing the Claw Jam Sensor .............................. 6-39P 4.7.
CONTENTS 5.6.1 Left Deck Drive Assembly ......................... 7-30P 5.6.2 Vertical Path Duplex/Right Deck Drive Assembly ...... 7-30P 5.6.3 Main Motor Drive Assembly ......................... 7-31P 5.6.4 Manual Feed Pickup Drive Assembly ............... 7-31P 5.6.5 Waste Toner Drive Assembly ......................... 7-32P 5.6.6 Left Deck Pull-Out Roller Drive Assembly ............... 7-32P 5.6.7 Drum Drive Assembly ..... 7-32P 5.6.
CONTENTS 1.4 Deck Lifter ............................... 8-9P 1.4.1 Detecting the Presence/ Absence of Paper ............... 8-9P 1.4.2 Indicating the Level of Paper on the Deck Front Cover .. 8-11P 1.5 Opening/Closing the Compartment .......................... 8-12P 1.5.1 Opening/Closing the Compartment .................... 8-12P 1.5.2 Sequence of Operations (opening/closing the compartment) ................... 8-13P 1.6 Controlling the Deck .............. 8-14P 1.6.
CONTENTS CHAPTER 9 SHIFT TRAY 1. Specifications ................................. 9-1P 2. Names of Parts ............................... 9-2P 3. Outline of the Electrical Circuit ..... 9-3P 3.1 Shift Tray Driver PCB ............. 9-3P 3.2 Inputs to and Outputs from the Shift Tray Driver PCB ........ 9-4P 4. Outline of Operations ..................... 9-5P 4.1 Shifting ..................................... 9-5P 4.2 Stacking .................................... 9-5P 4.3 Detecting paper ......................
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1. Safety 1.1 Safety of Laser Light Laser light could prove to be harmful to the human body. To ensure safety, the machine’s laser optical system is sealed inside a protective housing and by external covers, serving to prevent leakage of the light. The user is safe from the hazards of laser light as long as he/she uses the machine under normal operating conditions. 1.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION F01-102-01 CDRH Label The descriptions on the label may differ among different models of a product. 1-2 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.3 Handling the Laser Unit It is important to avoid inserting a tool having a high reflectance (e.g., screwdriver) into the path of laser light whenever servicing areas around the laser unit. Further, it is also important to get into the habit of removing watches, rings, or the like, which could reflect laser light to the eye. The machine’s laser light is red in color.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION F01-103-02 Laser Caution Label (100/120-V model) F01-103-03 Laser Caution Label (230-V model) 1-4 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION F01-103-04 Laser Caution Label (230-V model) COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.4 Safety of Toner Toner is a non-toxic material consisting of plastic and iron matter with a small amount of dye. If your skin or clothes have come into contact with toner, remove as much of it as you can with paper, and wash with water. Do not use hot water to avoid turning the toner into a gel. (It will fuse with the fibers of cloth, making removal difficult). Toner tends to react to vinyl and dissolve. Do not allow it to come into contact with vinyl material.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2. Image Formation 2.
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION The machine’s image formation process consists of the following eight steps: Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Pre-exposure Primary charging (positive DC) Laser exposure* Development (AC + positive DC) Transfer (negative DC) Separation (AC + positive DC) Fixing Drum cleaning *Deposits toner on the VD. Used also for blank exposure. Static Image Formation Block 2. Primary charging 3. Laser exposure 1. Pre-exposure 4. Development 8. Drum cleaning 5.
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 1. Basic Operations 1.
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 1.2 Outline of Electrical Circuitry 1.2.1 Outline The major electric mechanisms of the printer unit are controlled by the CPU on the DC controller PCB; the principal functions of the major elements are as follows: 1.2.
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS Reader unit Control panel Finisher (accessory) DC loads · clutch · solenoid · motor · sensor · fan · etc. Cassette paper level detection PCB IC120 (IPC communication 2) Controller unit IC125 (CPU) IC121 IC122 (RAM) DIMM/ROM (IC117) IC104,105 IC109,110 IC127,130 (EEPROM) DC controller PCB BD PCB Laser Duplexing AC driver Potential control driver M15 driver PCB PCB PCB PCB Laser scanner motor HVT PCB DC load · clutch · solenoid · motor · sensor · etc.
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 1.3 Sequence of Basic Operations 1.3.
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS Period WNUP (warm-up) INTR (initial multiple rotation) CNTR1 (control rotation 1) CNTR2 (control rotation 2) LSTR (post rotation) STBY (standby) Description From when the power switch is turned on to when the surface temperature of the fixing assembly reaches 195°C. From when the surface temperature of the fixing assembly has reached 195°C to when it reaches 200°C; this is to even out the surface temperature of the fixing roller.
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 1.4 Controlling the Main Motor (M2) 1.4.
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 1.5 Inputs to and Outputs from the Major PCBs 1.5.
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 1.5.2 Inputs to the DC Controller PCB • Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (1/7) DC controller PCB Right lower cover open/closed sensor Manual feed tray open/closed sensor PS2 J8508 -1 -2 -3 PS3 J157 -1 -2 -3 PS4 J256 -1 -2 -3 Claw jam sensor J809 -4 -1 -3 -2 -2 -3 J801 -A15 -A1 -A14 -A2 -A13 -A3 J154 -4 -1 -3 -2 -2 -3 J284 -3 -2 -1 J287 -2 J113 +5V -A15 -A14 LODOP -A13 When the right lower cover is closed, '1'.
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS • Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (2/7) DC controller PCB Left deck lifter sensor Left deck paper sensor Left deck limit sensor Cassette 3 paper sensor Cassette 4 paper sensor Cassette 3 open/closed sensor Cassette 4 open/closed sensor Cassette 3 lifter sensor Cassette 4 lifter sensor PS10 J565 -1 -2 -3 J561 -6 -10 -5 -11 -4 -12 J115 +5V -A6 -A5 LDLTP -A4 When paper is detected, '1'.
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS • Inputs to the DC Controller (3/7) DC controller PCB Right deck retry sensor Left deck retry sensor Cassette 3 retry sensor Cassette 4 retry sensor Multifeeder paper sensor Vertical path 1 paper sensor Vertical path 2 paper sensor Vertical path 3 paper sensor Vertical path 4 paper sensor PS19 J515 -1 -2 -3 J511 -A9 -A1 -A8 -A2 -A7 -A3 J112 +5V -A9 -A8 RDRT -A7 When paper is detected, '1'.
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS • Inputs to the DC Controller (4/7) DC controller PCB Laser write start sensor Registration paper sensor PS28 J1519 -1 -2 -3 PS29 J262 -1 -2 -3 J807 -3 -1 -2 -2 -1 -3 J252 J283 -5 -9 -5 -4 -10 -4 -3 -11 -3 J254 -7 -1 -6 -2 -5 -3 J113 +5V -B3 -B2 LWRPD -B1 J801 -B3 -B13 -B2 -B14 -B1 -B15 J251 J281 -12 -A3 -A18 When paper is detected, '1'. J106 -A9 RGPD When paper is detected, '1'.
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS • Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (5/7) DC controller PCB Reversal sensor 1 PS37 J1513 -1 -2 -3 J226 -3 -2 -2 -3 -1 -4 J2305 -15 -14 -13 J2302 -B2 J107 J222 -B15 -B2 -B15 RVS1 When paper is detected, '1'. Duplexing driver PCB Reversal sensor 2 PS38 J1516 -3 -2 -1 J225 -1 -1 -2 -2 -3 -3 J223 -3 -3 -2 -4 -1 -5 J2306 -B3 -B2 -B1 J2302 J222 J107 -B1 -B16 -B16 RVS2 -B1 When paper is detected, '1'.
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS • Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (6/7) DC controller PCB J727 -3 -1 -2 -2 -1 -3 SVR1 Manual feed paper width detection SVR2 Cassette 3 paper level detection SVR3 Cassette 4 paper level detection Cassette 3 paper width detection SVR4 SVR5 Cassette 4 paper width detection (100-V model only) J806 -1 -2 -3 J801 -B6 -B10 -B5 -B11 -B4 -B12 J113 +5V -B6 -B5 C3PLV -B4 J810 -1 -2 -3 J801 -B9 -B7 -B8 -B8 -B7 -B9 J113 +5V -B9 -B8 C4PLV -B7 J5500 -1 -2 -3 J111 +5V -B
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 1.5.3 Inputs to the DC Controller PCB • Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (7/7) DC controller PCB MSW3 Fixing/feeding lock sensor N.O.
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS • Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (1/7) DC Controller PCB J715 -1 -2 Developing clutch Registration roller clutch CL1 CL2 -2 J261 -1 -2 J254 -3 -5 -2 -4 -1 -1 J283 -1 -4 J108 -B1 -2 +24V -B2 DEVCD* When '0', ON. J281 -10 J251 -A5 -A16 -9 -A6 -A15 J106 -A5 +24V -A6 RGCD* When '0', ON.
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS • Output from the DC Controller PCB (2/7) Right deck pickup solenoid Left deck pickup solenoid Reversing flapper solenoid Fixing web solenoid J421 J2105 -1 -2 -1 SL6 -2 -1 DC controller PCB J105 -3 J2108-11 -2 Motor driver PCB J566 -1 -2 SL7 SL8 -2 J224 -1 -2 J223 J2306 -4 -2 -B4 -2 -5 -1 -1 J102 -B5 -1 RDPUSD* When '0', ON. +24V -B6 LDPUSD* When '0', ON. J222 J2302 -B11 -B6 -B5 J107 -B6 -B11 RVFSD2* When '0', ON.
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS • Outputs from the DC Controller PC (3/7) DC controller PCB FM8 Duplexing feeding fan J232 -1 -3 -2 -2 -3 -1 J222 J2302 -A6 -A11 -A6 -A12 -A5 -A12 J2303 -1 -2 -3 Duplexing driver PCB Drum motor Main motor M1 M2 J602 -2 -3 -4 -1 J601 -1 -2 Right deck lifter motor M4 J632 -2 -3 -4 -1 J631 -1 -2 +5V J108 -A7 -A6 DMON -A5 DMFG -A8 J6320 -3 -2 -2 -3 -1 -4 -4 -1 J6310 -1 -1 -2 -2 -1 J418 -2 M5 Pre-transfer charging wire charging motor Transfer/separation chargin
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS • Outputs from the DC Controller PC (4/7) DC controller PCB Hopper stirring motor Hopper supply motor M9 M10 Right deck pickup motor J158 -1 -2 J153 -3 -5 -2 -4 -1 J153 -1 -7 -2 -2 J411 -2 -5 -5 -2 -1 -6 -3 -4 -6 -1 -4 -3 M11 -4 J155 -1 -2 -1 J103 -B7 -B8 M9ON* When '0', ON. J103 -B5 -6 J2102 -2 -5 -1 -3 -6 -4 +24V +24V -B6 M10ON* When '0', ON.
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS • Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (5/7) DC controller PCB Laser scanner motor Duplexing horizontal registration motor Pre-registration motor M15 M16 J2511 -2 -3 -4 -5 -1 J116 +24V -4 -3 LMON -2 LMRDY* -1 LMSPSEL -5 J201 -4 -2 -3 -3 -2 -4 -1 -5 -5 -1 J230 -1 -6 -2 -5 -3 -4 -4 -3 -5 -2 -6 -1 J229 J2306 -4 -6 -A4 -5 -5 -A5 -6 -4 -A6 -7 -3 -A7 -8 -2 -A8 -9 -1 -A9 J2302 J222 See descriptions on laser exposure in Chapter 3.
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS • Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (6/7) DC controller PCB Cassette 4 lifter motor M21 J805 -1 -2 J801 J2106 -B12 -B4 -3 -2 -B13 -1 -B3 J2108 -4 -4 J105 -10 C4MLD When '1', ON. 0V Motor driver PCB Left deck pickup motor M24 J417 -2 -5 -5 -2 -1 -6 -3 -4 -6 -1 -4 -3 J2103 -2 -5 -1 -3 -6 -4 +24V J104 -B4 -B3 -B2 M24_B* -B1 M24_B -A20 M24_A* -A19 M24_A J2101 -B17 -B18 -B19 -B20 -A1 -A2 While in rotation, alternates between '1' and '0'.
CHAPTER 2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS • Outputs from the DC Controller PCB (7/7) DC controller PCB LA1 J192 -1 -3 J163 -1 -4 -3 -2 J103 -A3 +24V Pre-exposure LED -1 -A4 -3 PEXP* When '0', ON. (grid wire) Primary charging (primary charging wire) Transfer charging Dust-collecting roller J4502 Developing assembly Pre-transfer charging Separation charging J102 Highvoltage PCB J7371 See descriptions on charging control in Chapter 4.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM 1. Outline of Operations 1.1 Outline The laser exposure system consists of a laser unit and a laser scanner: the laser unit is the source of laser light, while the laser scanner serves to generate a scanning laser beam by means of a polygon mirror.
CHAPTER 3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM The laser exposure system consists of the following major components: The machine uses a small-diameter, 12-facet polygon mirror, a lens construction possesing a large angle of radiation, and a single-beam laser, all with considerations to high speed, low power, and low noise operation.
CHAPTER 3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM 1.2 Basic Sequence of Operations (laser exposure system) Main power switch ON 195˚C WMUP INTR CNTR LSTR Laser scanner motor (M15)* Image leading edge signal (PTOP) STBY Original set/ADF opened Start key ON INTR PRINT STBY LSTR In-wait rotation In-wait rotation Laser BD signal (BD) *:If silence mode has been selected in user mode, a switch-over to half-speed rotation is made after a specific period of time during in-wait rotation.
CHAPTER 3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM 2. Generating Sync Signals 2.1 Outline The BD signal used to synchronize video signals for laser scanning direction is generated by the BD PCB with reference to the laser beam reflected by the BD mirror, mounted along the path of the laser beam. The CCD/AP PCB reads image signals from the CCD, and sends them to the controller unit.
CHAPTER 3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM 2.2 Flow of Sync Signals [1] The BD signal goes ‘0’ when laser light is detected. [2] A phase matching is conducted with reference to the printer, and sync signals are generated. [3] Using the printer sync signal, image data is read from the image memory. [4] Video signals are generated. [5] The 2-pixel parallel signal is converted into a 1-pixel serial signal. [6] The laser drive signal drives the laser in response to the video signals.
CHAPTER 3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM 3. Laser Driver Circuit 3.1 Controlling the Laser The laser driver circuit serves to drive the semiconductor laser in response to the laser drive signal (LD) from the DC controller PCB. The following are control items associated with the laser driver circuit: 1. Turning on/off laser light. 2. Controlling the intensity of laser light (ACP control). 3. Controlling the intensity of laser light to suit the surface potential of the drum.
CHAPTER 3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM Laser assembly J117 J2502 1 LD(+) [1] 2 3 4 LD(-) [1] GND J121 Laser Laser drive circuit Intensity monitor [5] J2501 1 2 20 19 GND 3 4 EEPROM [6] 3 2 1 5V 5 6 7 9 GND LD-DT [7] GND 10 11 LD-EN [3] 13 14 LSH [2] 18 19 20 GND 3.3V GND L-RDY 18 17 16 15 14 12 11 10 8 7 3 2 1 Laser driver PCB DC controller PCB J113 B5 Laser unit LWRPD [4] Laser write start sensor (PS28) F03-301-01 REF. 1.
CHAPTER 3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM DISPLAY>DPOT>LLMT-P Indicates the laser power voltage control mechanism for printer (PDL) images. DISPLAY>DPOT>LLMT Indicates the laser power voltage control mechanism for copying. DISPLAY>DPOT>LPOWER-P Indicates the result of potential control mechanism for the laser intensity during output of printer (PDL) images. DISPLAY>DPOT>LPOWER-C Indicates the result of the potential control mechanism for the laser intensity during output of copy images.
CHAPTER 3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM 4. Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 4.1 Outline The following signals are used to control the laser scanner motor: [1] Laser scanner motor drive signal. When ‘1’, the laser scanner motor is turned on (i.e., turning on/off the motor). [2] Laser scanner motor speed switch signal. When ‘0’, the motor is rotated at full speed; when ‘1’, in-wait rotation (i.e., switching the speed). [3] Laser scanner motor ready signal.
CHAPTER 3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM 5. Disassembly and Assembly The machine’s mechanical characteristics and features are as described herein, and the machine may be disassembled or assembled as instructed while keeping the following in mind: 1. The power plug must be disconnected for the work. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, the machine may be assembled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it. 3. The screws must be identified by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM 5.1 Scanner Unit 1) Open the front cover. 2) Open the hopper cover [1]; then, remove the three screws [2], remove the connector cover [3], and disconnect the connector. [1] [2] [3] F03-501-01 3) Slide out the hopper unit [4]. [4] F03-501-02 4) Remove the two screws [5], and detach the toner dish [6]. [5] [6] F03-501-03 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JUNE 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 3 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM 5) Remove the tape fixing screw of the right cover. 6) Remove the screw [7], and detach tje developing assembly locking unit [8]. Remove the four screws [9], and detach the scanner cover [10]. [9] [10] [7] [9] [8] F03-501-04 7) Disconnect the connector [11], and slide out the developing assembly [12]; then, detach the hopper slot [13]. Disconnect the four connectors, and remove the four screws [14]; then, slide out the scanner unit [15].
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 1. Outline of Processes 1.1 Outline The functions and methods used in the machine's image formation system are as follows: Item Photosensitive drum Function/method Amorphous silicon (80-mm dia.) Cleaning method: blade Developing assembly Developing cylinder (24.5-mm dia.) Developing method: dry, 1-component, toner projection Toner: magnetic, negative Pre-exposure Array of 63 LEDs Turning on/off the Pre-exposure LED Array.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM The image formation system is constructed as follows: Primary charging assembly Pre-exposure Potential sensor Cleaner unit Developing assembly Dust-collecting roller Pre-transfer charging assembly Separation charging assembly Transfer guide Transfer charging assembly F04-101-01 4-2 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 1.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM • during printing, 1 original, 2 prints Start key ON STBY INRT PRINT [1] [2] LSTR STBY [3] Main motor (M2) Drum motor (M1) Laser activation Pre-exposure LED Primary charging Grid bias Developing clutch (CL4) Developing bias (AC) Developing bias (DC) Dust-collecting roller bias (DC) Pre-transfer charging bias (AC) Pre-transfer charging bias (DC) Transfer charging Separation charging bias (AC) Separation charging bias (DC) F04-102-02 Note the following about the seque
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 2. Potential Control 2.1 Outline Laser driver PCB The functions and control mechanisms related to the potential control system are as follows: 1. Controlling potential for the copier/printer 2. Correcting power (APC, i.e., Auto Power Control) 3. Determining primary current (VD control) 4. Determining laser output (VL control) 5.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 2.1.1 Controlling Potential for Printing/Copying The machine's potential control consists of potential control for printing and level of potential control for copying. The mechanism used to control potential for printing uses a standard target potential (VD) of 420 V to ensure the reproduction of line widths. Its mechanism used to control potential for copying uses a standard target level of potential (VD) of 370 V to help limit the consumption of toner.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM • The sequence of operations is as follows during warm-up. Fixing assembly temperature 195˚C 200˚C WMUPR WMUP STBY Potential control for copying [1] Potential control for printing [2] Drum motor (M1) Primary charging Laser Potential sensor VD VD VD VL1 VL1 VL2 VDVD VD VL1 VL1 VL2 F04-201-02 Note the following about the sequence: [1] Potential control for copying; potential is measured as follows: of VD, 8 times max; of VL1, 8 times max; of VL2, once.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM • Any of the following three may be selected for potential control executed 10 and 60 min after the main power switch is turned on (COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CNTMD): [1] OFF (default); no potential control is executed. [2] Reduced mode; reduces the duration by assuming the potential of the other mode after potential control. [3] Standard mode; executes potential control for both copying and printing in succession.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM • Standard Mode (selected in service mode) The two types of potential control (for copying and printing) are executed in succession: 10 min later to before 60 min Potential control for copying Potential control for printing Start key ON Potential control for copying and printing during the first job Potential control 60 min and later Potential control for copying and printing during the first job Potential control Fixing assembly temperature195˚C (end of fixing assembl
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC (forced execution of potential control) ON: executes potential control COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>EPOTOFST (entering offset value for potential sensor) COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>DE-OFST (adjusting Vdc for copying) COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>VD-OFST (entering offset value for VD target potential for copying) COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>DE-OFS-P (adjusting Vdc for printing) COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>VD-OFS-P (entering offset value for VD target potential for printing) COPIER>FUNCT
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 2.2 Determining Primary Current To measure the dark area potential (VD) for the first time after the power switch is turned on, the current used during previous measurement is let to flow, and the potential sensor is used to measure the surface potential of the drum.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 2.3 Determining the Laser Output To measure the light area potential (VL1) after the power switch is turned on, the potential based on the previous laser output (LP0) is let to flow, and the surface potential of the drum is measured by the potential sensor.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 2.4 Determining the Developing Bias The developing bias (Vdc) is determined as follows based on the drum surface potential (VL2): Vdc = VL2 + Vdc In terms of copying potential, Vdc = 110 V In terms of printing potential, Vdc = 85 to 110 V (The potential for printing varies in keeping with the reading of the environment sensor to ensure the reproduction of appropriate line widths.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 2.5 APC Correction The surface potential fluctuates in keeping with the increase/decrease in the laser output caused by changes in laser temperature. To maintain the surface potential to a specific level, the control value of the laser output is corrected.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM [3] Last Rotation APC Control Purpose: If intermittent printing is repeated in a short period of time, the absence of potential control will change the VL potential of the laser output. To make up for the change, an appropriate correction value is obtained for the laser output control value, and the updated value is used for the next job. Timing: During last rotation for the first job 30 min after the laser output correction.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 2.6 Density Adjustment in Each Mode For the following operation modes, the developing bias determined during potential control is corrected, and the result is used as the target value in each specific mode for density adjustment. [1] Density Adjustment in Copying Purpose: Density adjustment is executed to obtain a level of density suited to the needs of the user.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 2.6.2 Density Adjustment During Printing The developing bias is raised to decrease the print density. Too high a developing bias, however, will result in hazy images. Near the lower limit of the developing bias, the changes in the developing bias are corrected and correction is also executed as part of image processing (thickening).
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3. Controlling Charging 3.1 Controlling Pre-Exposure LED 3.1.1 Outline The machine is equipped with a pre-exposure LED array to prevent adhesion of excess toner to the photosensitive drum because of residual charge, and its system of control serves the following functions: 1.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3.2 Controlling Primary Charging 3.2.1 Outline The primary charging control system serves the following functions: 1. Turning on/off the primary corona current. 2. Controlling the primary corona current to a specific level. 3. Controlling the grid bias to a specific level (fixed to 850 V by varistor).
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3.2.2 Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism The system used to clean the primary charging wire is turned on at such times as follows, and the system is constructed as shown in the following figure: Timing of Cleaning 1. If the temperature of the fixing roller is 100°C or lower at power-on. 2. If wire cleaning is executed in user mode. 3. At the end of making 2000 prints*1 after the end of cleaning.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3.2.3 Others COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI-GRID (entering output adjustment value for grid bias) Enter the value indicated on the service label if the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been replaced. COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>WIRE-CLN Execute auto cleaning if (five round trips) the primary charging wire or the transfer charging wire has been replaced.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3.3 Dust-Collecting Roller Bias 3.3.1 Outline The machine is equipped with a dust-collecting roller for collection of stray toner occurring after development. The toner found on the surface of the dust-collecting roller is removed by a scraper. The dust-collecting roller bias is controlled for the following: 1. Turning on/off the dust-collecting roller bias.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3.4 Controlling the Pre-Transfer Charging 3.4.1 Outline The system used for pre-transfer charging serves the following functions: 1. Controlling the DC bias to a specific level of current. 2. Controlling the AC bias to a specific level of voltage. 3. Controlling the output to suit the environment (fuzzy control).
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3.4.2 Controlling the Output to Suit the Environment (fuzzy control) The pre-transfer charging current is optimized in relation to the site conditions (i.e., base on the data from the environment sensor).
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3.4.3 Cleaning Mechanism for the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly The pre-transfer charging wire is cleaned at such times as shown below, and its cleaning mechanism is constructed as follows: Timing of Cleaning 1. If the temperature of the fixing roller is 100°C or lower at power-on. 2. When wire cleaning is executed in user mode. 3. At the end of last rotation for printing of each 2000 prints*1. *1: Default; may be changed in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>W-CLN-P.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3.4.4 Others COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>PRE-TR (entering the output adjustment value of pre-transfer charging wire current) Enter the value indicated on the service label if the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been cleared.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3.5 Controlling Transfer Charging 3.5.1 Outline The system used to control transfer charging serves the following functions: 1. Controlling the DC bias to a specific level of current. 2. Controlling the output to suit the environment (fuzzy control). The following shows the construction of the control system related to the transfer charging control system. The transfer current varies as follows in keeping with the potential of TR-CNT.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3.5.2 Controlling the Output to Suit the Environment (fuzzy control) The output of the transfer current is optimized to suit the environment (identified using data from the environment sensor).
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3.5.3 Cleaning Mechanism for the Transfer Charging Assembly The transfer charging wire is cleaned at such times as follows, and its control mechanism is constructed as follows: Timing of Cleaning 1. If the temperature of the fixing roller is 100°C or lower at power-on. 2. When cleaning is executed in user mode. 3. At the end of making 2,000 prints*1 after cleaning *1: Default; may be changed in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>W-CLN-P.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3.5.4 Others COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>TR-N1 (Use it to adjust the output of the transfer charging current for the first side of a double-sided print or for a single-sided print of plain paper.) COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>TR-N2 (Use it to adjust the output of the transfer charging current for the second side of a duplexing print of plain paper.) Enter the value indicated on the service label if the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been cleared.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TR-SP-C1 (Use it to switch the transfer/separation output value for pickup from the right deck.) COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TR-SP-C2 (Use it to switch the transfer/separation output for pickup from the left deck.) COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TR-SP-C3 (Use it to switch the transfer/separation output value for pickup from the cassette 3.) COPIER>OPTON>BODY>TR-SP-C4 (Use it to switch the transfer/separation output value for pickup from the cassette 4.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3.6 Controlling Separation Charging 3.6.1 Outline The system used to control separation charging serves the following functions: 1. Controlling the DC bias to a specific level of current. 2. Controlling the AC bias to a specific level of voltage. 3. Corrects the output to suit the environment and the density of the original used (surface potential of the drum; fuzzy control).
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM The following signals are used: [1] separation charging leakage detection signal; ‘0’ when an excessively high or low level of current is detected. [2] separation charging current control signal; when about 3 V or higher and lower than 11 V, the output of the separation current turns ON; when about 12 V or higher, it turns OFF. [3] separation charging remote signal; turns on/off the output of the separation current. COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3.6.2 Correcting the Output to Suit the Environment and the Density of the Original Used The output of separation current is optimized to suit the environment (identified by data from the environment sensor) and the density of the original used (surface potential of the drum); the control is in the three levels of High, Medium, and Low.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3.6.3 Others COPIER>ADJUST>HV-SP>SP-N1 (Use it to adjust the output for the first side of a double-side print or for a single-sided print of plain paper.) COPIER>ADJUST>HV-SP>SP-N2 (Use it to adjust the output of the second side of a double-sided print of plain paper.) If the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been cleared, enter the value indicated on the service label.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4. Hopper/Developing Assembly 4.1 Outline The following component parts are associated with the developing assembly: Hopper supply motor Hopper stirring motor M9 M10 Angled feed screw Toner feed screw Toner supply Feed screw Toner sensor (TS2) Stirring rod Toner feed screw Developing assembly toner sensor (TS1) Developing cylinder M1 Main motor CL1 Developing assembly clutch F04-401-01 4-36 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4.2 Controlling the Drive to the Hopper/Developing Assembly The system used to control the drive of the developing assembly is constructed as follows: 1 J103B DC controller PCB 24V 5 M10ON*[1] 6 24V 7 M9ON* [2] 8 Hopper stirring motor M9 Hopper supply motor M10 J108B 24V 1 DEVCD* [3] 2 J108A 1 M1_LCK 9 M1_ON 10 5V 11 0V 12 M1 CL1 Developing assembly clutch F04-402-01 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM The following signals are used: [1] hopper stirring motor drive signal; when ‘0’, the motor rotates to stir the toner. [2] hopper supply motor drive signal; when ‘0’, the motor rotates to supply toner. [3] developing assembly clutch drive signal; when ‘0’, the developing assembly clutch turns on. 4-38 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4.3 Controlling the Developing Bias The system used to control the developing bias serves the following functions: [1] Controlling the DC bias to a specific level of voltage. [2] Controlling the AC bias to a specific level of voltage. AC output 1500Vpp J102A J4502 1 8 DEV-DC-CNT [1] 9 DEV-AC-REMOTE [2] 12 11 10 9 8 10 11 7 12 5 13 4 3 2 1 14 15 16 6 Developing cylinder The developing DC bias varies as follows in keeping with the potential of DEV-DC-CNT.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP>BIAS (Use it to enter the adjustment value for developing bias.) Enter the value indicated on the service lable if the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been cleared (from 0 to obtain darker images to 600 to obtain lighter image). COPIER>ADJUST>DEVLEOP>HVT-DE (Use it to enter the offset value for the output of developing high voltage for the high-voltage unit.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4.4 Detecting the Level of Toner and Controlling the Supply of Toner The following component parts are associated with the toner supply system: J103A ··· DC controller PCB 1 7 8 5V DTEP [1] 0V 9 TS2 J103B ··· 1 9 5V TEP [2] 10 0V 11 1 TS F04-404-01 The following signals are used: [1] developing assembly toner level detection signal; when the absence of toner is detected, ‘0’.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4.4.1 Sequence of Operations (toner supply) The toner inside the developing assembly is monitored by the developing assembly toner sensor (TS1); when it drops below a specific level, the developing assembly toner level signal goes ‘0’ and is sent to the DC controller PCB. When the DC controller PCB detects the developing assembly toner level signal for 0.3 sec or more, the hopper motor drive signal will be issued so that the hopper will start to supply toner.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 5. Drum Cleaner Unit 5.1 Outline The following component parts are associated with the drum cleaner unit: Pre-exposure lamp (LED) Cleaning blade Auxiliary roller Waste toner feedscrew Separation claw Magnet roller F04-501-01 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 5.2 Detecting the Waste Toner The system used to detect waste toner (full condition) is constructed as follows: ··· 1 J108A M1_LCK 9 M1_ON 10 5V 11 12 0V M1 Main motor (front) J107 1 ··· DC controller PCB Waste toner feedscrew lock detection (MSW1) 17 18 WT-RCK 0V To MSW1 Waste toner bottle F04-502-01 4-44 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM E013 (waste toner lock) It is indicated when the waste toner lock sensor (MSW2) remains on for 4 sec or more. The waste toner bottle is capable of holding as much toner as may be used for a maximum of about 500,000 prints. Memo COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 6. Controlling the Drum Heater 6.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM • Turning On/Off the Drum Heater Power OFF Main motor (M2) OFF Wait Main motor (M2) ON Printing Standby, Jam, Front cover open Power save mode Environment sensor (SW3) ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Drum heater (H3) Half wave OFF Full wave Full wave Half wave (full wave if 120/230 V) Half wave (full wave if 120/230 V) Half wave (full wave if 120/230 V) Half wave (full wave if 120/230 V) Full wave Full wave Full wave Full wave T04-601-01 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANO
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM The drum heater is controlled to 43°C by the drum heater control PCB. When wear of the drum or parts associated with charging assemblies advances, halftone images can become distorted if printed in a high temperature/humidity environment (much moisture in the air). To prevent distortion, SW2001-1 on the drum heater control PCB may be turned on to change from 43°C to 47°C (default: OFF, control at 43°C).
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7. Disassembly and Assembly The machine’s mechanical characteristics and features are as described herein, and the machine may be disassembled or assembled as instructed while keeping the following in mind: 1. The power plug must be disconnected for the work. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, the machine may be assembled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it. 3. The screws must be identified by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7.1 Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit 7.1.1 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit 1) Open the front cover, and slide out the hopper unit to draw out the fixing/feeding unit. 2) Take out the process unit. (See p. 454P.) 3) Remove the primary charging assembly. 4) Remove the potential sensor unit. 5) Remove the two mounting screws [1], and remove the potential sensor rail stay [2].
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7.2 Photosensitive Drum Points to Note When Handling the Photosensitive Drum The machine’s photosensitive drum is made of high-sensitivity amorphous silicon, and its sensitivity can start to deteriorate depending on how and where it is placed, requiring the following: 1. Whenever the process unit is removed from the machine or the photosensitive drum is removed from the process unit, be sure to protect the photosensitive drum against light.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7) Remove the two mounting screws [3], and detach the front side stay [4]. [3] [4] [3] F04-702-02 8) Holding it as indicated, detach the photosensitive drum [5]. Take care not to damage the photosensitive drum when removing it. The bearing at the rear and the gear at the front of the drum need not be removed.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Protect the removed photosensitive drum against dirt and scratches with five to six sheets of copy paper or with the drum protective sheet stored near the waste toner case. 3) Remove it from the rear together with the drum heater control PCB [3]. 4) Disconnect the connector [4], and detach the drum heater [5] from the photosensitive drum. [4] [5] [3] F04-702-05 7.2.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7.3 Process Unit 7.3.1 Removing the Process Unit 1) Open the front cover. 2) Remove the developing assembly. (See p. 4-73P.) 3) Remove the hopper assembly. (See p. 478P.) 4) Remove the primary charging cooling fan. 5) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly, and place the drum protective sheet [1] on the registration roller assembly. 6) Disconnect the four connectors [2], and remove the two mounting screws [3].
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7) Insert the drum rotating tool [4] into the slot [5] in the drum shaft. While keeping the drum in place so that it will not rotate counterclockwise, insert a screwdriver into the center opening [6] in the drum rotating tool to remove the drum fixing screw. [5] Drum shaft If the drum is let to rotate counterclockwise, the cleaning blade will not come into contact with the drum correctly, leading to cleaning faults.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 9) Holding the grip [8] of the process unit as indicated, take it out. [8] F04-703-04 7.3.2 Mounting the Process Unit Mount the process unit by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in mind: [1] [2] 1) On the left rail, place the process rail along the guide plate [1] at the front/ rear of the rail. On the right rail [2], place the process unit on the L-shaped stay.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7.4 Potential Sensor/Potential Control PCB 7.4.1 Removing the Potential Sensor/Potential Control PCB Be sure to replace the potential sensor and the potential control PCB at the same time. [3] 1) Open the front cover, and slide out the hopper unit. 2) Remove the developing assembly and the primary cooling fan. 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the potential sensor assembly [3].
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7) Remove the two screws [9], and detach the potential control PCB together with the mounting base [10]. [10] [9] F04-704-04 8) Remove the four screws [11] and three connectors [12], and detach the potential control PCB [13]. [11] [12] [13] F04-704-05 4-58 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7.4.2 Adjusting the Potential Sensor The potential sensor and the potential control PCB are adjusted in a pair, requiring simultaneous replacement. [2] 1) Start service mode, and set ‘0’ to the following to disable potential control: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT. 2) Replace the potential control PCB. 3) Connect the connector of the potential sensor to the connector of the machine. 4) Fit the potential checking electrode (FY9-3012) [2] to the potential sensor [1].
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 6) Insert the door switch actuator into the door switch assembly. 7) Connect the power plug to the power outlet, and turn on the main power switch. 8) Execute the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>OFST. 9) Record the setting of on the service label. 10) Start service mode, and set ‘1’ to the following to enable potential control: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7.5 Primary Charging Assembly 7.5.1 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly 1) Open the front cover, and slide out the hopper assembly. 2) Loosen the mounting screw [1], and slide up the fixing member [2] to secure the fixing member in place. 3) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the primary charging assembly [4].
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7.6 Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly 7.6.1 Removing the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly 1) Open the front cover, and slide out the hopper assembly. 2) Remove the mounting screw [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the pre-transfer assembly [3]. [1] [3] [2] F04-706-01 When you have mounted the pre-transfer charging assembly, be sure to execute ‘wire cleaning’ in user mode.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7.7 Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly 7.7.1 Removing the Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly 1) Open the front cover, and slide out the fixing/feeding unit. 2) Remove the feeding right front cover. 3) Remove the mounting screw [1], and detach the fixing guide [2]. [1] [2] F04-707-01 4) Disconnect the connector [3], and slide out the transfer/separation charging assembly [4] to the front; then, detach it by pulling it up at an angle. [4] [3] F04-707-02 7.7.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 2) Make sure that the leaf spring [3] of the fixing/feeding unit comes in contact with the frame of the transfer/separation charging assembly (slide from the front). [2] [3] F04-707-04 [2] [2] F04-707-05 3) Mount the fixing guide plate [4] with a mounting screw [5]. [5] [4] F04-707-06 4-64 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 4) If you have replaced the transfer charging wire or the transfer/separation charging assembly be sure to execute the following in service mode to clean the wire: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING> WIRE-CLN. If you have replaced the separation charging wire or the separation charging assembly, be sure to execute ‘wire cleaning’ in user mode.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7.8 Charging Wire 7.8.1 Outline The photosensitive drum is surrounded by three charging wires (for primary charging, pre-transfer, and transfer/separation). These charging wires are newly adopted brown wires (0.06 mm in diameter). Do not use a gold-plated wire, which has been used in the past; otherwise, image faults may occur.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 3) Free a length of about 5 cm of charging wire from the charging wire reel (0.06 mm in diameter), and form a loop at its end with a diameter of about 2 mm. REF. To form a loop, wind the charging wire around a hex key once, and turn the hex key three to four times; then, twist the charging wire. 4) Cut the end (excess) of the twisted charging wire. 5) Hook the loop on the stud.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7) Cut off the excess of the charging wire with nippers. 8) Pick the end of the charging wire tension spring with tweezers, and hook it on the charging power supply electrode. In the case of the pre-transfer charging assembly, hook the spring on the pin at the front. F04-708-05 Make sure of the following: • The charging wire must not be bent or twisted. • The charging wire must be fitted in the V-groove of the charging wire positioner.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7.8.4 Routing the Grid for the Primary Charging Assembly 1) Loosen the two mounting screws used to secure the left and right shielding plates in place. 2) Loosen the three mounting screws used to secure the motor unit in place at the front. Screws F04-708-07 3) Loosen the mounting screw, and move it in the direction indicated; then, fix it in place temporarily. 4) Free a length of about 5 cm of charging wire from the charging wire reel (0.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 8) Cut the excess of the charging wire with nippers. 9) Tighten the mounting screw loosened in step 3). Keep tightening until the tension of the grid wire is even. Be sure to pay attention to avoid deformation (slack) of the charging assembly (as by tightening the mounting screw found on the front of the left/right shielding plate early). 10) Tighten the mounting screws loosened in steps 1) and 2). 11) Wipe the grid wire with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. 1.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7.8.5 Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire Charging assembly Height of charging wire Tolerance Primary ±1mm 7.5 +1.5 - 0 mm 7.5 +1.5 - 0 mm A Pre-transfer No height adjusting mechanism 10.06±0.3 mm B Transfer 9.5±0.5mm ±2mm C Separation 16.0±0.5mm 14.9±0.5mm ±2mm D T-04-708-01 REF.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7.8.6 Cleaning the Primary Anti-Stray Sheet 1) 2) 3) 4) Open the front cover. Remove the developing assembly. Remove the hopper assembly. Remove the process unit. (See p. 454P.) 5) Remove the two screws [1], and remove the potential sensor rail stay [2]. [1] [2] [1] F04-708-10 6) Clean the primary anti-stray sheet [3]. [3] F04-708-11 4-72 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7.9 Developing Assembly The machine’s developing assembly is not equipped with a cover to protect the developing cylinder. If you must remove the developing assembly, be sure to exercise care not to damage the developing cylinder. When the developing assembly is outside the machine, be sure not to mount the developing assembly locking assembly.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7.9.2 Removing the Blade Unit 1) Take the developing assembly out of the machine. 2) Remove the two mounting screws [1], and detach the developing assembly cover [2]. [1] [2] [1] F04-709-03 3) Place a newspaper on the floor or a desk, and pour out the toner onto the newspaper from the developing assembly. 4) Remove the two mounting screws [3], and detach the blade unit [4] together with its mounting base.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7.9.3 Mounting the Blade Mount the blade by reversing the steps used to remove it. 1) Push the blade mounting base against the developing assembly, and tighten the two mounting screws. When mounting the blade, place copy paper on the developing cylinder first to protect the developing cylinder. 7.9.4 Removing the Developing Cylinder/Magnetic Seal 1) Remove the developing assembly from the machine. 2) Remove the blade unit.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 5) Remove the two mounting screws [7], and detach the electrode plate [8]. [7] [8] F04-709-07 6) Remove the mounting screw [9], and detach the magnetic positioning plate [10]. [9] [10] F04-709-08 7) Remove the grip ring [11] mounted to the cylinder shaft at the front, and detach the push-on roll [12]. [11] [12] F04-709-09 4-76 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 8) Remove the two mounting screws [13], and detach the blade [14] together with its mounting plate. [13] [14] [13] F04-709-10 9) Remove the bearing [15] at the front and the rear, and detach the developing cylinder [16]. [15] [16] [15] F04-709-11 Do not leave fingerprints or oils on the surface of the developing cylinder. Otherwise, dry wipe it with lint-free paper. (Do not use solvent.) 7.9.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7.10 Hopper Assembly 7.10.1 Removing the Hopper Assembly from the Machine 1) Slide out the hopper assembly to the front. (See p. 3-11P.) 2) Remove the mounting screw [1], and detach the hopper assembly [2]. [1] [2] F04-710-01 4-78 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7.11 Drum Cleaner 7.11.1Construction Cleaning blade Separation claw F04-711-01 7.11.2 Removing the Cleaning Blade 1) Slide out the process unit from the machine. (See p. 4-54P.) 2) Remove the primary charging assembly. 3) Disconnect the connector [1] of the AC line of the drum heater. 4) Remove the four mounting screws [2], and detach the cleaning blade assembly [3].
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 6) Disconnect the connector [6], and remove the two screws [7]; then, detach the pre-exposure LED assembly [8]. [8] [7] [6] F04-711-04 7) Loosen the five mounting screws [9], and detach the blade support plate from the cleaning blade. [9] F04-711-05 7.11.3 Mounting the Cleaning Blade When mounting the cleaning blade, be sure that the side with the marking [1] will be the face.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 2) Tighten the five mounting screws [2] lightly, stopping to turn them when resistance is felt. 3) Turn the screws tightened lightly in step 2) about 20° to 30° in the order indicated, tightening them fully. [2] 5 3 1 2 4 Order of tightening F04-711-07 After mounting the cleaning blade, check to make sure that the edge of the blade is not appreciably bent.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7.11.4 Mounting the Side Seal 1) Mount the side seal [1] to the cleaner housing where indicated (both ends). AT this time, be sure that the edge of the side seal is positioned as follows: • When replacing the side seal [1] at the front, push the magnet roller [2] toward the rear and then make sure that the inner end of the side seal is within the area [3] of the washer.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7.11.5 Cleaning the Cleaner Side Scraper Perform the following when replacing the cleaning blade (every 500,000 sheets). 1) Remove the cleaning blade. 2) Remove any paper lint collecting at the tip of the side scarper (A, i.e., between magnet roller and toner guide roller) using tweezers or the like. 3) Remove the toner from the surface of the magnet roller. (Roll copy paper into a U to scoop it up.
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 7.12 Separation Claw/Separation Claw Drive Assembly 7.12.1 Removing from the Drum Unit 1) Remove the process unit from the machine. (See p. 4-54P.) [2] [1] [4] [3] F04-712-01 1.Take care not to break the separation claw. 2.Take care not to damage the photosensitive drum. 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the cover [2]. 3) Remove the two screws [3], and detach the claw holder [4]. 4-84 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 1. Outline 1.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 1.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM The following sensors are used to monitor the movement of paper: Notation PS4 PS19 PS20 PS21 PS22 PS23 PS24 PS25 PS26 PS27 PS28 PS29 PS30 PS31 PS32 PS33 PS34 PS35 PS36 PS37 PS38 PS46 Name Claw jam sensor Right deck retry sensor Left deck retry sensor Cassette 3 retry sensor Cassette 4 retry sensor Manual feed paper sensor Vertical path 1 paper sensor Vertical path 2 paper sensor Vertical path 3 paper sensor Vertical path 4 paper sensor Laser write start sensor Registration
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2. Pickup Assembly 2.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM The following figure shows the system used to control cassette pickup operations: F05-201-02 J110-A8 Cassette 3 retry signal (C3RTD) J110-A14 Vertical path 3 paper detection signal (VP3PD) J104B Vertical path upper motor drive signal M26 J113-A2 Vertical path 2 paper detection signal (VP2PD) DC controller PCB J104B Vertical path lower motor drive signal M27 PS25 J104A Cassette 3/4 pickup motor drive signal M12 J110-A17 Cassette 3 pickup solenoid drive signal (C3PUSD*
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2.1.1 Outline The paper inside the deck/cassette is held up by a lifter so that it remains in contact with the pickup roller, which is driven by the pickup motor (M11, M12, M24). The pickup motor (M11, M12, M24) turns on, and the pickup roller rotates to feed paper. The pickup solenoid (SL3, SL4, SL6, SL7) turns, and the pickup roller moves away from the paper.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2.1.2 Sequence of Operations (pickup) a.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM b.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2.1.3 Pickup Retry Operation If the retry sensor (PS19, PS20, PS21, PS22) detects a delay (as caused by wear on the pickup roller), the machine executes pickup retry operation. If a delay is detected once again after a retry, the machine will indicate the Jam message in its control panel.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2.1.4 Others The following is used to switch the temperature control mechanism for the fixing heater to use thick paper sequence when a specific source is selected: COPIER>OPTION>CST>C1-DWSW C1: front deck (right) COPIER>OPTION>CST>C2-DWSW C2: front deck (left) 5-10 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2.2 Lifter Movement 2.2.1 Outline When the deck or the cassette is pushed in, the cassette open/closed sensor turns on and, at the same time, the pickup roller moves down. The condition causes the light-blocking plate to move away from the lifter sensor, consequently turning on the cassette lifter motor to move up the lifter. The lifter keeps moving up unitil the lifter sensor detects the surface of paper.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM The following figures show the components of the deck and the cassette: • Deck retry sensor Paper Feed rollers Pickup roller Separation rollers Limit sensor Pickup roller Lifter sensor Lifter position Paper lever detecting lever Paper sensor Deck open/ closed sensor Lifter F05-202-01 • Cassette retry sensor Pickup roller Feed rollers Paper Separation roller Pickup roller Lifter sensor Lifter Paper sensor Cassette open/ closed sensor F05-202-02 5-12 P COPYRIGHT
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2.2.2 Lifter Limiter Control Circuit (right/left deck) When the CPU on the DC controller PCB generates the motor drive signal, the lifter motor turns on to move up the lifter. When the deck reaches the lifter sensor, the deck lifter detection signal is sent to the CPU, which in response will stop the deck lifter drive motor. The deck lift sensor is mounted in consideration of the motor failing to stop.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2.2.3 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper The presence/absence of paper in the deck or the cassette is detected by the cassette paper sensor. • Paper Is Present Paper sensor • Paper Is Absent Paper detecting lever Paper sensor Paper detecting lever Paper Lifter Lifter F05-202-04 F05-202-05 2.2.4 Detecting the Level of Paper a.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM b. Operation In the case of the right/left deck, two sensors are used to detect the position of the deck base plate, and the level of paper is identified with reference to the state of the sensors (on/ off). The absence of paper is detected by an exclusive sensor (See 2.2.3 “Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper”).
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM In the case of the cassette 3/4, the level of paper is identified with reference to the resistance read of the variable resistor operating in conjunction with the movement of the lifter drive shaft.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2.3 Identifying the Size of Paper in the Cassette 2.3.1 Right/Left Deck The right/left deck does not possess a paper size detection mechanism, and its size configuration is changed as follows (A4, B5, LTR): [1] Changing the position of the paper size guide plate of the cassette. [2] Registering the new paper size in service mode.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM Paper width detecting VR Width guide (rear) Width guide (front) Paper length sensor unit Length guide Cassette F05-203-01 Paper length detection Paper width detection Cassette 3 SV2 (2 photointerrupters) SVR4 Cassette 4*1 SV1 (2 photointerrupters) SVR5 *1 Not standard with the 120/230V model T05-203-01 c.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2.3.3 Markings on the Width Guide Rail The width guide rail found inside the cassette is provided with paper size positioning holes, given markings from A through M as shown below. These markings can help determine whether the correct paper width is selected, as when the user reports skew movement of paper (Note that this information is not disclosed to the user).
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2.3.4 Paper Sizes The DC controller PCB identifies the size of paper based on inputs of paper width and length as shown in the following table, and sends the result of identification to the controller unit. The paper sizes in the following table are selected from specific groups. The asterisk (*) indicates a factory setting. Paper length sensor Paper Signal width sensor ON/ (slice level) OFF Unit: mm 288.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM COPIER>OPTION>CST>CST-U1 31: G-LTR*; 22: K LGL COPIER>OTPION>CST>CST-U2 24: FLSC*; 26: OFI; 27: E-OFI; 36: A-OFI; 37: M-OFI COPIER>OPTION>CST>CST-U3 34: G-LGL*; 35: FOLI; 25: A-FLS COPIER>OPTION>CST>CST-U4 18: LTR*; 29: A-LTR *Factory setting. COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C3-STMTR Used to adjust the paper width basic value for STMTR in the cassette 3. COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C3-A4R Used to adjust the paper width basic value for A4R in the cassette 3.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM • Paper Types Supported by the Machine Paper name Notation A3 A4R A4 A5 A5R B4 B5R B5 11×17 LTRR LTR STMT STMR LEGAL Korean Government Korean Government R FOOLSCAP Australian Foolscap OFICIO Ecuadorian Officio Bolivian Officio Argentine LTR Argentine LTRR Government LTR Government LTRR Argentine LGL Government LGL FOLIO Argentine Officio A3 A4R A4 A5 A5R B4 B5R B5 11×17 LTRR LTR STMT STMTR LGL K-LGL K-LGLR FLSC A-FLS OFI E-OFI B-OFI A-LTR A-LTRR G-LTR G-LTRR A-LGL G-LGL
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2.4 Manual Feed Tray Pickup Assembly 2.4.1 Pickup Operation The presence/absence of paper on the manual feed tray is detected by the manual feed paper sensor (PS23). The manual feed pull-out roller is driven by the main motor by way of the manual feed pickup clutch (CL3). When the clutch is engaged, the manual feed holding plate solenoid turns on to shift up the manual feed holding tray.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2.4.2 Detecting the Size of Paper on the Manual Feed Tray The side guide on the manual feed tray is set by the user to suit the width of paper. The resistance of the variable resistor changes in keeping with the movement of the side guide, and the reading is sent to the DC controller PCB for identification of the width of paper. The machine is not equipped with a mechanism to detect the length of paper, requiring the user to select a specific size.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 3. Controlling the Registration Clutch 3.1 Outline The registration clutch is controlled so that print paper and the image on the drum match at a specific point, and the timing at which it is turned on may be adjusted in service mode (ADJUST>FEED-ADJ>REGIST). 3.2 Control System Registration rollers Main motor M2 CL2 Registration drive signal (RGCD*) J106-A6 DC controller PCB F05-302-01 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 4. Double-Sided Prints 4.1 Control System 4.1.
M14 M29 M18 J104B Vertical path duplexing feeding motor drive signal J107-B13 Duplexing pre-registration paper detection signal (DGRFPD) J107A Duplexing/feeding right motor drive signal J107-B14 Duplexing feeding right motor drive signal (DPDS) PS37 J107-B12 Duplexing horizontal registration signal (DSRGPD) PS38 J107A Duplexing/feeding left motor drive signal J107-B16 Reversal detection signal 2 (RVS2) SL8 PS46 J107B Reversal motor drive signal J107-B15 Reversal detection signal 1 (RVS1) J107-B
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 4.1.3 Outline The feeding path for the first side of a double-sided print is formed when the delivery flapper solenoid (SL5) tuns off and the reversing flapper solenoid (SL8) turns on, thereby shifting up the delivery flapper and the reversing flapper. When the leading edge of a sheet after printing on its first side reaches the delivery assembly jam sensor (PS48), the reversing flapper solenoid turns on.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 4.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 4.3 Through-Path Operation 4.3.1 Outline The term “through-path” is used to refer to the moving of paper to the duplexing feed assembly after it has been moved to the reversing assembly by the work of the delivery flapper and the reversing flapper.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 4.3.2 Outline of Operations The following shows through-path operation when printing one set of duplexing prints of 10 originals. 1) The 1st sheet is picked from the deck. 2) The 1st side is printed on the 1st sheet. The 2nd sheet is picked up. 1 3) The 3rd side is printed on the 2nd sheet. The 1st sheet is moved to the reversing assembly. The 3rd sheet is picked up. 4) The 1st sheet is moved to the duplexing feeding assembly.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 5) The 1st sheet is moved to duplexing wait position. The 2nd sheet is moved to the reversing assembly. The 5th side is printed on the 3rd sheet. 6) The 1st sheet is repicked from duplexing wait position. The 2nd sheet is moved to the duplexing feeding assembly. 5 5 3 1 3 1 7) The 2nd side is printed on the 1st sheet. The 2nd sheet is moved to duplexing wait position. The 4th sheet is picked up.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 10) The 2nd sheet is delivered. The 9th side is printed on the 5th sheet. 9) The 4th side is printed on the 2nd sheet, and the 3rd sheet is held in wait in duplexing wait position. The 5th sheet is picked up. 4 4 3 3 5 9 7 7 5 2 1 11) The 6th side is printed on the 3rd sheet. The 4th sheet is held in wait in duplexing wait position. 1 2 12) The 3rd sheet is delivered. 6 6 5 5 9 7 4 2 3 1 3 2 9 4 7 1 F05-403-03 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 13) The 8th side is printed on the 4th sheet. 14) The 4th sheet is delivered, and the 10th side is printed on the 5th side. 8 8 7 7 9 9 3 4 1 2 1 6 3 2 5 4 5 6 15) The 5th sheet is delivered. 10 9 8 3 2 5 4 7 6 1 F05-403-04 5-34 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 4.4 Detecting Horizontal Registration Position 4.4.1 Outline Paper position: Detection: Drive: Position: detected by the duplexing horizontal registration sensor (PS31). started when the duplexing paper sensor (PS34) turns on. from the duplexing horizontal registration motor (M16). measured with reference to pulses from the duplexing horizontal registration motor (1 pulse = 0.16 mm, approx.).
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 4.4.2 Operation The home position of the duplexing horizontal registration sensor is detected each time the main power switch is turned on, jam recovery is made, or front cover is closed; and the sensor moves to the start position (for A4) when the registration sensor turns on.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 5. Controlling the Pickup Assembly 5.1 Pickup Assembly Motors The pickup assembly possesses as many as 12 2-phase stepping motors of magnetic excitation type. Each motor is supplied with 24-V power from the motor driver PCB, and is turned on/off and its direction of rotation is controlled by pulse signals from the DC controller PCB.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 6. Controlling the Delivery Assembly 6.1 Reversal Delivery Operation The machine delivers its output using a face-up or face down method.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 3) The reversal motor (M14) rotates once again to move the paper in the direction of delivery with the trailing edge of the paper leading the way. Point of reversal PS46 PS37 PS37 Reversing flapper M14 F05-601-03 4) The reversal motor (M14) stops when the external sensor (PS36) turns on and the trailing edge of the paper moves past the reversing roller. The fixing motor (M19) rotates, and the paper is delivered by the work of the external delivery roller.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 7.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM • The cassette heater (H4) used for the 100-V model operates as follows, assuming that the environment switch (SW3) remains on: Main power switch (SW1) ON OFF Cassette heater switch (SW4) Cassette heater (H4) ON Standby/front cover open OFF ON OFF ON OFF During printing In power save mode OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF T05-700-01 • The cassette heater (H4) used for the 230-V model operates as follows, assuming that the environment switch (SW3) remains on: Main po
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 8. Detecting Jams 8.1 Outline 8.1.1 Arrangement of Jam Sensors PS36 PS35 PS4 PS29 PS28 PS46 PS38 PS31PS34 PS30 PS37 PS33 PS20 PS24 PS32 PS19 PS25 PS26 PS21 PS27 PS22 F05-801-01 5-42 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 8.1.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 8.2 Sequence of Operations (jam detection) 8.2.1 Delay Jam a. Pickup from the Cassette (right deck, left deck, cassette 3/4) • The leading edge of paper does not reach the sensor within a specific period of time after the motor turns on. Start key ON or PRINT set INTR / PRINT [1] [1] Motor N-1 Jam check Sensor N Error Normal [1]: specific feed period.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM b. Other Delay Jams With the exception of the pickup sensor delay jam, the following timing of detection applies: The feed time between the sensor N-1 and the delay jam sensor N is under control with reference to the clock pulses from the main motor, and a delay jam will be identified if the leading edge of paper does not reach the delay jam sensor N within a specific feed period.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 8.2.2 Stationary Jams a. Ordinary Stationary Jam Start key ON or PRINT set INTR Jam check Sensor N / PRINT L+A L+A Normal L = paper length. Error A = specific feed distance.
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 8.2.3 Jam History The machine keeps a record of jams that occur inside it, and allows a check in service mode. COPIER>DISPALY>JAM Use it to display jam data. COPIER>FUNCTION>JAM-HIST Use it to clear the jam history. The machine remembers the following in the event of a jam, and will resume operation using the data after removal of the jam: • Remaining number of copies • Copying mode COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 9. Disassembly and Assembly The machine’s mechanical characteristics and features are as described herein, and the machine may be disassembled or assembled as instructed while keeping the following in mind: 1. The power plug must be disconnected for the work. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, the machine may be assembled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it. 3. The screws must be identified by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 9.1 Manual Feed Tray Assembly [2] [1] 9.1.1 Removing the Right Upper Cover 1) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the cover [2]. F05-901-01 2) Disconnect the connector [3], and detach the right upper cover [4]. [3] [4] F05-901-02 9.1.2 Opening of the Right Upper Cover 1) Open the right upper cover, and remove the mounting screw [1]. [1] F05-901-03 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 9.1.3 Removing the Manual Feed Pull-Out Roller Unit 1) Open the right upper cover. (See p. 549P.) 2) Remove the two stop rings [1] (left, right), and shift the two bushings [2]; then, detach the manual feed pull-out roller unit. [1] [2] F05-901-04 9.1.4 Removing the Feeding Roller [2] [1] 1) Open the right upper cover. (See p. 549P.) 2) Remove the manual feed pull-out roller unit. (See p. 5-50P.) 3) Remove the stop print [1], and detach the pickup roller [2].
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 3) Disengage the hook [4] of the separation roller assembly, and detach the separation roller [5]. [4] [5] F05-901-07 9.1.6 Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation Roller 1) Remove the right upper cover. 2) Remove the upper guide [1]. 3) If double feeding or pickup failure occurs during pickup, adjust the position of the pressure spring of the separation roller.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 9.1.7 Removing the Manual feed Tray Paper Sensor 1) Open the right upper cover. (See p. 549P.) 2) Remove the mounting screw [1], and detach the cover [2]. [1] [2] F05-901-10 3) Remove the mounting screw [3], and detach the sensor unit [4]. [3] [4] F05-901-11 4) Free the harness [5] from the harness guide [6], and disconnect the connector [7]. 5) Remove the sensor [8]. [5] [6] [7] [8] F05-901-12 5-52 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 9.1.8 Attaching the Side Guide Timing Belt in the Manual Feed Tray Assembly 1) Butt the rack plate [1] of the manual feed tray against section A (open state). 2) Move the slide volume in the direction of B, and attach the timing belt [2] onto the pulley [3]. [2] [1] B A [3] F05-901-13 9.1.9 Removing the Manual Feed Pull-Out Roller 1) Open the right upper cover. (See p. 549P.) 2) Remove the manual feed pull-out roller unit. (See p. 5-50P.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 9.2 Deck Pickup Assembly 9.2.1 Removing the Right Deck Pickup Assembly 1) Slide out the right deck. 2) Open the right upper cover and the right lower cover. An attempt to remove the pickup assembly without removing the deck will cause the lifter to get trapped, not holding the pickup assembly from sliding out. [4] [2] [3] [4] 3) Remove the mounting screw [1], and detach the connector cover [2]; then, disconnect the connector [3].
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 3) Disconnect the connector [3] from inside the machine, and remove the locking support [4]. [3] [4] F05-902-03 4) Remove the two screws [5], and detach the two pickup fixing plates [6]; then, detach the cassette 2 pickup assembly [7]. [7] [6] [5] [5] [6] Keep supporting the pickup assembly; otherwise, the pickup assembly could drop when the fixing plate is removed. F05-902-04 9.2.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM n Orientation of the Pickup Roller The pickup roller may be mounted by reversing the steps used to remove it while keeping the following in mind: • The pickup rollers used at the front and the rear are not interchangeable. • The pickup roller for the front has a gold-colored collar.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 9.2.7 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Deck/Cassette Pickup Assembly When mounting the feeding roller assembly [1] to the cassette pickup assembly, be sure that the belt pulley [2] is at the front of the machine. (front) [2] Check to make sure that the protrusion in the roller plate and the roller are engaged securely. [1] (rear) F05-902-09 9.2.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 3) Detach the separation roller [7] from the separation roller shaft support. Cassette 3/4 Right deck pickup assembly [7] Left deck pickup assembly [7] F05-902-12 The urethane sponge used in the part is pink at the beginning, and changes to yellow over time (accelerated if exposed to light; it may appear to change to orange before turning pink). This is a common characteristic of urethane sponge, and does not indicate physical deterioration (performance).
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 9.2.9 Adjusting the Separation Roller Pressure • • If double feeding or pickup failure occurs during pickup, change the position for the pressure spring of the separation roller. If double feeing occurs, move the spring in the direction of arrow B. If pickup failure occurs, change the spring in the direction of arrow A. A B F05-902-14 9.2.10 Orientation of the Separation Roller Keep the following in mind when replacing the separation roller.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 9.2.11 Adjusting the Left/Right Registration for the Front Deck 1) Loosen the four screws [2] and the two fixing screws [3] on the cassette front cover [1]. [3] [2] [3] [2] [1] [2] F05-902-16 [4] 2) Move the cassette guide assembly (front) [4] to the front or the rear to make adjustments. F05-902-17 9.2.12 Adjusting the Registration for the Cassette 3/4 1) Loosen the two fixing screws [1] found on the left and right of the cassette.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2) Remove the paper size plate [2], and make adjustments using the adjusting screw [3] found at the rear of the widow of the paper size plate [2]; thereafter, tighten the two fixing screws [1]. Then, be sure to execute the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CST-C3STMTR/A4R or C4-STMTR/A4R. [2] [3] F05-902-19 9.2.13 Removing the Lifter Motor M20 (M21) of the Cassette 3 (4) 1) Slide out the right deck and the cassette 3/4. 2) Take out the cassette right cover.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 2) While keeping the lifter motor M20 (M21) [3] to the right, tighten the screw [4] temporarily. [3] [4] F05-902-22 3) Set the cassette 3 (cassette 4) in the machine without paper.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 6) Fully tighten the two screws of the lifter motor M20 (M21). 7) Mount back the removed parts, and turn on the machine. 8) Press the cassette release button under the following conditions, and turn on the machine: • the cassette contains no paper. • the cassette contains about 550 sheets of paper. 9.2.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 9.3 Vertical Path Roller Assembly 9.3.1 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 1 1) Remove the right deck pickup assembly. 2) Remove the following from the front: E-ring [1], 1 pc. bushing [2], 1 pc. 3) Remove the following from the rear: E-ring [3], 1 pc. bushing [4], 2 pc. roller base [5] blue gear [6] parallel pin [7] [6] [3] [7] [4] [2] [1] [4] [5] F05-903-01 4) Remove the guide plate [8], and detach the vertical path roller 1 [9]. [9] [8] F05-903-02 9.3.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 3) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the screw [4]; then, detach the guide plate [5]. [4] [5] [3] F05-903-04 4) Remove the E-ring [6] from the front of the roller shaft, and move the bearing [7] toward the inside; then, detach the vertical path roller 2 [8]. [7] [8] [6] F05-903-05 9.3.3 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 3/4 1) Remove the cassette pickup assembly. 2) Remove the following from the front: E-ring [1], 1 pc. spacer [2], 1 pc. bearing [3], 1 pc.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 9.4 Registration Feeding Assembly 9.4.1 Removing the Registration Clutch [1] 1) Remove the fixing/feeding unit from the machine. 2) Loosen the two sems screws [1], and detach the stopper [2]. 3) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the registration clutch [4]. [4] [2] [3] F05-904-01 9.4.2 Removing the Registration Roller 1) Remove the fixing/feeding unit from the machine. 2) Remove the feeding right cover of the fixing/feeding unit.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 6) Remove the following from the back: spring [3] E-ring [4] spacer [5] bearing [6] stopper [7] [6] [3] [7] [5] [4] F05-904-03 7) Remove the following from the front: screw [8] spring [9] E-ring [10] spacer [11] bearing [12] stopper [13] break [14] 8) Remove the registration roller [15]. [13] [9] [15] [12] [10] [11] [8] [14] F05-904-04 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM [1] [3] 9.5 Feeding Assembly 9.5.1 Removing the Feeding Belt 1) Slide the fixing/feeding unit from the machine. 2) Remove the fixing front cover, feeding right cover, and feeing left cover. 3) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the harness guide [3]. [2] [1] F05-905-01 4) Remove the two mounting screws [4], and detach the fixing/feeding unit releasing lever support [5].
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 7) Remove the mounting screw [16], and detach the cover [17]. 8) Detach the feeding belt [18] and the postcard belt [19]. [18] [16] [19] [17] F05-905-05 9.5.2 Removing the Fixing/Feeding Unit Releasing Lever Switch 1) Slide the fixing/feeding unit out of the machine. 2) Remove the feeding right cover and the feeding left cover. 3) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the harness guide [3].
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 9.6 Duplex Unit 9.6.1 Removing the Duplex Unit 1) Slide the duplex unit out of the machine. 2) Remove the three screws [1] and two knobs [2]; then, detach the front cover [3]. 3) Holding the left and right grips [4] of the duplex unit, take it out of the machine. [2] [4] [4] Take care not to trap your hand between the grip and the rail. Further, do not place the duplex unit where it may suffer damage. [3] [1] F05-906-01 9.6.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 4) Remove the two mounting screws [4], and detach the reversal motor [5] from the support plate. [4] [5] [4] F05-906-04 9.6.4 Mounting the Reversal Motor 1) While the spring [1] has most tension, tighten the two mounting screws [2] temporarily. [2] [1] [1] [2] F05-906-05 2) Mount the support plate [4] (2 pc.) and the motor [5] using three mounting screws [3]; then, attach the timing belt [6]. [3] [6] [3] [5] [4] F05-906-06 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 3) Loosen the two screws [2] that have been tightened temporarily, and check to make sure that the spring provides tension; then, tighten the screws [2]. [2] F05-906-07 At the end, be sure the timing belt has tension. 9.6.5 Removing the Duplexing Feeding Left Motor 1) Remove the front cover of the duplex unit. 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the two screws [2]; then, detach the duplex feeding left motor [3]. [1] [2] [3] [2] F05-906-08 9.6.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 9.6.7 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor 1) Remove the duplex unit from the machine. 2) Remove the horizontal registration unit. 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness [2] from the harness guide [3]. 4) Remove the two mounting screws [4], and detach the horizontal registration motor [5]. [4] [5] [4] [3] [2] [3] [1] F05-906-10 9.6.8 Removing the Duplex Pre-Registration Sensor 1) Slide the duplex unit out the machine.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 4) Disconnect the connector [5], and remove the sensor [6]. [5] [6] F05-906-13 [1] 9.6.9 Removing the Duplex Paper Sensor 1) Slide the duplex unit out of the duplex unit. 2) Remove the two mounting screws [1], and detach the cover [2]. [2] F05-906-14 3) Remove the two mounting screws [3], and detach the sensor together with its base [4]. [3] [4] [3] F05-906-15 4) Disconnect the connector [5], and remove the sensor [6].
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 9.6.10 Removing the Reversal Sensor 1 1) Slide the duplex unit out of the machine. 2) Remove the two mounting screws [1], and detach the sensor together with its base [2]. [1] [2] [1] F05-906-17 3) Disconnect the connector [3], and detach the sensor [4]. [3] [4] F05-906-18 9.6.11 Removing the Reversal Sensor 2 1) Slide the duplex unit out of the machine. 2) Remove the two mounting screws [1], and detach the sensor together with its base [2].
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 3) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the sensor [4]. [3] [4] F05-906-20 9.6.12 Removing the Left Deck Feed Paper Sensor 1) Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the two mounting screws [2] from the bottom of the duplex unit; then, detach the sensor together with its base [3]. [2] [3] [2] [1] F05-906-21 2) Remove the left deck feed paper sensor [4]. [4] F05-906-22 5-76 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 9.6.13 Removing the Horizontal Registration Sensor 1) Remove the duplex unit from the machine. 2) Remove the horizontal registration unit. 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the horizontal registration sensor [2]. [1] [2] F05-906-23 9.6.14 Removing the Duplex Driver PCB 1) Slide the duplex driver out of the machine. 2) Remove the front cover of the duplex driver. 3) Disconnect all connectors from the duplex driver PCB.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 9.6.15 Removing the Horizontal Registration Unit 1) Remove the duplex unit from the machine. 2) Remove the front cover of the duplex unit. 3) Turn over the duplex unit. 4) Remove the mounting screw [1] from the front. 5) Remove the mounting screw [2] and disconnect the connector [3] from the rear; then, detach the horizontal registration unit [4]. (front) [1] (rear) [4] [3] [2] F05-906-25 9.6.
CHAPTER 5 PICK UP/FEEDING SYSTEM 3) Remove the two mounting screws [4], and detach the duplex feeding fan [5]. [5] Be sure that the arrow indicating the direction of air is as indicated when mounting the duplex feeldng fan. [4] F05-906-27 9.6.17 Mounting the Reversing Flapper Solenoid 1) Adjust the position of the solenoid using two screws [2] so that the drive lever [1] is fully pushed when the solenoid turns on (i.e., the plunger is drawn). [1] [2] F05-906-28 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 1. Outline of Operation 1.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM The fixing system is constructed of the following components: Cleaning web unit Cleaning web Sub heater (H2) Fixing upper roller Main thermistor (TH1) Sub thermistor (TH2) Main heater (H1) Upper separation claw Lower separation claw Thermal switch (TP1) Fixing assembly inlet guide Fixing lower roller F06-101-01 Fixing upper roller Sub thermistor (TH2) Main thermistor (TH1) Thermal switch (TP1) F06-101-02 6-2 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM Component Fixing upper roller Fixing lower roller Fixing motor Fixing assembly inlet guide drive solenoid Main heater Sub heater Main thermistor Sub thermistor Thermal switch Cleaning web Upper separation claw Notation M19 SL1 H1 H2 TH1 TH2 TP1 Description Heat roller (50-mm dia.) Pressure roller (38-mm dia.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 1.2 Basic Sequence of Operations (fixing system) Fixing temperature Main power Control panel switch ON power switch ON 195˚C SLEEP Wait indicator WMUP Red 200˚C WMUPR Start key ON STBY Green INTR PSTBY PRINT LSTR STBY Red Fixing motor (M3) Main heater (H1) 100V Sub heater (H2) 120/230V Sub heater (H2) 210˚C 205˚C 200˚C 195˚C 190˚C F06-102-01 6-4 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 2. Fixing Drive System 2.1 Outline The following are control times associated with the fixing drive system: Fixing roller drive Cleaning web drive Fixing assembly inlet guide drive Thermistor reciprocating mechanism drive Upper separation claw reciprocating mechanism J106B J106B Drive signal SL9 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 2.2 Controlling the Drive of the Fixing Roller The system used to control the fixing roller is constructed as follows: DC controller PCB Fixing upper roller J106 -A15 -A16 -A17 -A18 M19LD [2] M19ON [1] 5V GND J4005-1 -2 M19 24V GND Fixing motor DC power supply PCB The system makes use of the following signals: [1] Fixing motor drive signal; when ‘1’, the motor turns on.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 2.3 Controlling the Drive of the Cleaning Web The cleaning web used to clean the fixing upper roller is advanced by the fixing web solenoid (SL9; one-way clutch). The length of the cleaning web is detected by any of the following two ways: 1.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 2.4 Controlling the Drive of the Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide The machine changes the height of the fixing assembly inlet guide to suit specific paper sizes, thereby ensuring correct movement of paper.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 2.5 Controlling the Reciprocating Mechanisms of the Thermistor To prevent damage to the fixing upper roller by the main thermistor (TH1), the main thermistor is moved back and forth over a distance of about 12 mm in the axial direction of the fixing upper roller. The drive comes from the web drive solenoid (SL9), and is sent to the reciprocating cam by way of a one-way arm.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 2.6 Controlling the Reciprocating Mechanism of the Upper Separation Claw To prevent damage to the fixing upper roller by the upper separation claw, the upper separation claw is moved back and forth in the axial direction of the fixing upper roller. The system used to control the reciprocating mechanism of the upper separation claw is constructed as follows: Distance of travel: 3 mm (approx.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 3. Controlling the Fixing Temperature 3.1 Outline The following are control items associated with the fixing temperature control system: 1. Fixing heater temperature control 2.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 3.2 Temperature Control The machine uses the following methods to control the fixing temperature: State Normal Setting in service mode Item Description [1] Power-on sequence Used if the fixing roller is 75°C or lower at poweron. [2] Model-specific se- Used to suit the rated voltage of the model (100 V quence or 120/230 V).
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 3.2.1 Normal Sequence In normal sequence, the control will be as follows: • If the surface of the fixing upper roller is 75°C or lower (60 min from power-on). Main power switch ON SLEEP Wait indicator Start key ON Control panel power switch ON WMUP WMUPR*1 Red STBY INTR PSTBY PRINT Green LSTR STBY Red Fixing motor (M3) Main heater (H1) 100V Sub heater (H2) 120/230V Sub heater (H2) M/L mode 215˚C 210˚C 205˚C 200˚C 195˚C H mode *1:WMUPR in H mode is longer by 1 min.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM • 60 min or more from power-on Main power Control panel switch ON power switch ON SLEEP Wait indicator WMUP Red Fixing assembly 195˚C 200˚C WMUPR Start key ON STBY INTR PSTBY PRINT Green LSTR STBY Red Fixing motor (M3) Main heater (H1) 100V Sub heater (H2) 120/130V Sub heater (H2) 215˚C 210˚C 205˚C 200˚C 195˚C F06-302-02 Control temperature Initial multiple rotation Standby Start of printing During printing 195°C 200°C 200°C 203°C T06-302-03 6-14 P COPYRIGHT ©
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 3.2.2 Temperature Control by Mode a. Down Sequence (text mode) If the main thermistor (TH1) of the fixing upper roller detects any of the following levels of temperature, the machine increases the sheet-to-sheet interval to maintain a specific fixing temperature so as to prevent faulty fixing in continuous printing mode.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM b. Halftone Mode (other than text mode) The machine uses a higher down sequence temperature for modes other than text mode to prevent faulty fixing of halftone images. If text mode is used in combination with a non-text mode, the machine will use non-text mode down sequence throughout the job by placing priority on fixing.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM c. Overheating of the Ends In a low-temperature environment (machine temperature of lower than 12°C), an error can occur as a result of overheating of the edges (as when small-size paper is used) while copying temperature is controlled to 212°C and the temperature of the fixing upper roller is 75°C for a period of 60 min from power-on. If continuous printing is performed for 3 min or more, printing temperature is switched from 212°C to 205°C to prevent overheating. d.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 3.3 Detecting Errors The system used to control the fixing temperature checks for the following errors: DC controller PCB 1. Temperature error by the main thermistor (TH1) 2. Sensor error by the sub thermistor (TH2) 3.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM The control system makes use of the following signals: [1] Fixing roller temperature detection signal 1; generates a voltage suited to the temperature detected by the main thermistor. [2] Fixing roller temperature detection signal 2; generates a voltage suited to the temperature detected by the sub thermistor. [3] Sub heater drive signal; when ‘1’, the sub heater turns on. [4] Sub heater temperature detection signal; when the sub heater is supplied with power, ‘0’.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 4. Disassembly and Assembly The machine’s mechanical characteristics and features are as described herein, and the machine may be disassembled or assembled as instructed while keeping the following in mind: 1. The power plug must be disconnected for the work. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, the machine may be assembled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it. 3. The screws must be identified by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 4.1 Fixing Assembly 4.1.1 Removing the Fixing/Feeding Unit 1) Slide the duplex feeding unit out of the machine. 2) Remove the three screws [1], and two knobs [2], and detach the duplex feeding unit front cover [3]. [1] [2] [3] [1] F06-401-01 3) Slide the fixing/feeding unit out of the machine. 4) While pressing the stoppers [5] on both ends of the fixing/feeding unit slide rail [4], pull the fixing/feeding unit farther toward the front.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 4.1.2 Removing the Fixing Assembly [2] [3] 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. 2) Remove the three screws [1] and the knob [2]; then, detach the fixing/feeding left cover [3]. [1] F06-401-03 3) Disconnect the two connectors [4], and remove the three screws [5]; then, detach the fixing drive assembly [6]. [5] [6] [5] [4] [5] [4] F06-401-04 4) Disconnect the three connectors [7], and free the harness from the harness guide.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 5) Remove the mounting screw [8], and detach the cover [9]. [9] [8] F06-401-06 6) Open the fixing delivery assembly, and remove the two screws [10]; then, holding the front [12] and the rear [13] of the fixing assembly [11], remove the fixing assembly from the machine. [10] [13] [11] [12] F06-401-07 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 4.2 Fixing Roller Cleaning Assembly 4.2.1 Removing the Fixing Web 1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing assembly upper cover [2]. [1] [2] F06-402-01 3) Remove the two screws [3] used to hold the fixing web assembly in place, and open the fixing web upper assembly. [3] F06-402-02 4) While pushing the web feed roller [4] and the web take-up roller [5] toward the rear, remove the web [6].
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM Cleaning the Silicone Oil Pan Be sure to remove the silicone oil collecting in the oil pan [7] (found under the web feed roller). Further, if silicone oil should drip, be sure to wipe it clean. [7] F06-402-04 4.2.2 Mounting the Fixing Web Mount the fixing web by reversing the steps used to remove it.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 2) After attaching the fixing web, move the plunger [4] of the web feed solenoid in the direction of the arrow until the fixing belt is taut. Whenever you have replaced the fixing web, be sure to set ‘0’ to the following in service mode: COPIER>COUNTER>MISC> FIX-WEB COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL1>FIX-WEB. [4] F06-402-07 4.2.3 Adjusting the Fixing Web Solenoid (SL9) a.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 4.3 Fixing Heater and the Control Parts 4.3.1 Removing the Main/Sub Heater [2] 1) Remove the fixing assembly from the machine. 2) Remove the two fastons [1] and the two screws [2] at the rear; then, detach the heater positioning plate (rear) [3]. [1] [3] [1] F06-403-01 3) Remove the screw [4] and the faston [5] at the front, and detach the harness cover [6]. [4] The harness is equipped with a tie-wrap. Be sure to use a new tie-wrap if you have cut the tiewrap.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 4.3.2 Mounting the Main/Sub Heater Mount the fixing heater by reversing the steps used to remove it while keeping the following in mind: a. Do not touch the surface of the heater. b. Orient both heaters so that the side with the longer harness is toward the front. c. Mount the main heater [1] to the right and the sub heater [2] to the left (viewing from the front of the fixing assembly). d. Stagger the heater so that its protrusion will not interfere. e.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 3) Remove the two fastons [4] and the screw [5]; then, detach the thermal switch holder [6]. 4) Remove the four screws [7], and detach the thermal switch assembly [8]. [4] [6] [4] [7] [8] [5] [7] F06-403-07 5) Remove the two screws [9], and detach the thermal switch [10]. [9] [9] [10] F06-403-08 4.3.4 Removing the Main Thermistor 1) Remove the fixing assembly from the machine. 2) Remove the fixing web and the oil pan. 3) Remove the fixing harness cover.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 5) Free the harness [3] of the thermistor from the harness guide. 6) Remove the screw [4], and shift the thermistor assembly [5] to detach. When shifting the thermistor assembly to the rear, take care not to damage the fixing roller by the thermistor assembly. When mounting the thermistor, be sure that the harness [3] is on the inner side of the harness guide [6] of the mounting plate. Further, take care not to deform section A when detaching and attaching the thermistor.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 4.3.5 Removing the Sub Thermistor [3] [1] 1) Slide out the fixing assembly from the machine. 2) Remove the fixing web and the oil pan. 3) Remove the fixing harness cover. 4) Free the harness [1] of the sub thermistor from the harness guide. 5) Remove the screw [2], and detach the sub thermistor assembly [3]. [2] F06-403-12 6) Remove the screw [4], and detach the sub thermistor [5]. [4] [5] F06-403-13 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 4.4 Fixing Roller Assembly 4.4.1 Removing the Fixing Upper Roller [1] 1) Remove the fixing assembly form the machine. 2) Remove the fixing web, and clean the oil pan. 3) Remove the two fixing heaters. 4) Remove the stopper [1], one each from the front and the rear. 5) While paying attention to the thermal switch and the thermistor, detach the upper roller assembly.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 4.4.2 Mounting the Fixing Upper Roller Mount the upper roller by reversing the steps used to remove it. a. To avoid soiling or scratching the surface of the roller, wrap the upper roller with paper after removal. b. Mount it so that cut-off A is toward the rear as shown. c. Before mounting it, clean the electrode plate and the electrode terminals. A F06-404-03 4.4.3 Removing the Fixing Lower Roller 1) Remove the fixing assembly from the machine.
, CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 4.4.4 Adjusting the Nip a. Taking Measurements Wait for 15 min after the machine completes warm-up, and make 20 A4 copies before starting to measure the nip: c 1) Place A4/LTR paper, and select A4/LTR on the control panel. 2) Make the following selections in service mode to discharge the paper: Feeding COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIPb direction Center of CHK. paper b. Standard 1) Measure the points indicated. a and c are prints 10 mm from both edges of the sheet.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 4.5 Fixing Separation Assembly 4.5.1 Removing the Upper Separation Claw 1) Slide the fixing/feeding unit out of the machine. 2) Release the spring [1] used to open the fixing/delivery assembly, and remove the upper separation claw [2]. [2] [1] When mounting it, take care not to chip the tip of the upper separation claw [2]. F06-405-01 4.5.2 Removing the Lower Separation Claw 1) Remove the fixing assembly from the machine.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 4.6 Delivery Assembly 4.6.1 Removing the External Delivery Roller 1) Remove the fixing/feeding unit out of the machine. Remove the two screws [1], and detach the delivery roller guide [2]. [1] [2] [1] F06-406-01 2) Remove the screw [3] and the bushing [4]; then, detach the delivery unit [5]. 3) Remove the E-ring [6] at the front, and detach the bearing [7]. [7] [5] [6] [4] [3] F06-406-02 4) Slide the external delivery roller assembly [8] toward the rear to detach.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 5) Remove the six E-rings [9] of the rollers, and detach the six rollers [11]. [10] [9] Each roller is equipped with a parallel pin [10]. Take care not to drop it. [11] F06-406-04 4.6.2 Removing the Internal Delivery Roller 1) Remove the fixing assembly from the machine. 2) Remove the lower separation claw plate. 3) Remove the two E-rings [1] at the front, and remove the gear [2] and the bearing [3].
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 4.6.3 Adjusting the Position of the Delivery Flapper Solenoid (SL5) Adjust the position of the solenoid using the screw [2] so that the drive lever [1] is fully pushed when the solenoid turns on (i.e., the plunger is drawn). [1] [2] F06-406-07 6-38 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 4.7 Paper Sensor 4.7.1 Removing the Claw Jam Sensor 1) Remove the fixing assembly from the machine. 2) Remove the two screws from the lower separation claw assembly. 3) Remove the internal delivery roller. 4) Remove the mounting screw [1], and detach the sensor together with its support plate [2]. [1] [2] F06-407-01 5) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the snap-on assembly; then, detach the claw jam sensor [4]. [3] [4] F06-407-02 4.7.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 5) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the snap-on assembly; then, detach the internal delivery sensor [4]. [3] [4] F06-407-04 4.7.3 Removing the Delivery Jam Sensor 1) Remove the fixing assembly from the machine. 2) Remove the external delivery roller. 3) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the sensor support plate [2]. [1] [2] F06-407-05 4) Disconnect the connector [3], and detach the delivery jam sensor [4]. [4] [3] F06-407-06 6-40 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 4.7.4 Removing the External Delivery Sensor 1) Remove the fixing/feeding unit from the machine. 2) Remove the external delivery roller. 3) Remove the two sensors [1], and detach the sensor support plate [2]. [1] [2] F06-407-07 4) Disconnect the connector [3], and detach the external delivery sensor [4]. [4] [3] F06-407-08 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM 4.8 Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide Assembly 4.8.1 Adjusting the Position of the Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide Solenoid (SL1) Adjust the position of the solenoid using the two screws [1] so that the guide is as indicated when the solenoid turns on. 9.5mm 12.7mm Upper roller 3.2mm [1] Lower roller Inlet guide Solenoid F06-408-01 4.8.2 Adjusting the Position of the Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide • 1. 2. 3.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 1. Control Panel 1.1 Outline The machine’s control panel consists of the following PCBs and a touch panel (LCD) capable of display at a resolution of 320×240 dots: Control panel Control panel inverter PCB LCD PCB Control panel PCB (key & LED) Control panel power switch PCB Control panel CPU PCB · Key input monitor: keypad, function key · Buzzer control · Control panel LED activation LCD contrast adjustment PCB CPU Controller unit Adjusts the contrast of the LCD.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 2. Fans 2.1 Arrangement, Functions, and Error Codes The names, functions, and associated error codes of the fans used in the machine are as follows: Notation 2-speed control (voltage) Draws print paper to the feed belt. Yes (24/12 V) Cools the primary charging assem- Yes (24/12V) bly and cleaner. Error code E805 E824 Discharges exhaust of each fan to the outside of the machine. Cools the laser unit, drive unit, and controller. Removes curling of print paper after fixing.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS The arrangement of the fans and the direction of air are as follows: FM7 FM2 FM5 FM8 FM6 FM4 FM1 FM3 F07-201-01 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 2.2 Operation 2.2.1 Controlling the Speed Some of the fans used in the machine are controlled to two different speeds (F07-202-01), switched over by changing the voltage by the work of the voltage switching circuit of each fan. DC controller PCB CPU 24V 12V Full speed signal 24V or 12V Voltage switching Half speed circuit signal Clock signal Fan F07-202-01 2.2.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 3. Power Supply 3.1 Power Supply 3.1.1 Outline The machine’s DC power supply is controlled by the DC power supply PCB; the associated PCBs, parts, functions, and arrangement of distribution are as follows: Name DC power supply PCB Rush current prevention PCB Fuse PCB Main power switch (SW1) Environment switch (SW3) Cassette heater switch (SW4) Main relay (RL1) Description • Generates DC power from AC power. • Protects against overcurrent.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 3.1.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS The following shows arrangement of the machine’s power supplies: 100V model accessory 120V model Not used 230V model accessory AC line Drum heater (H3) Environment switch (SW3) AC driver PCB Main relay (RL1) B Main heater (H1) A 12V NE data controller (accessory) Laser driver PCB Laser scanner motor 24VU 3.3VA1 3.3VA2 3.3VB/5V 24V Reader controller PCB CCD/AP PCB 5V 12VU Fixing/ feeding relay PCB BD PCB 24V 24VA 24VU 5V 3.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 3.1.3 Output of Power Supplies The outputs of the machine’s power supplies are controlled by the main power switch, control panel power switch, or signal from the printer board.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 3.2 Rated Outputs of the DC Power Supply Output Connector 3VA1 J4014-1 J4014-2 J4014-3 J4014-4 J4014-5 Output voltage tolerance Rated output voltage Rated output current Level of activation (overcurrent protection) 3VA2 J4017-1 J4017-2 J4017-3 J4017-4 J4017-5 3VA3 J4003-7 ±3% 3VB J4015-1 J4015-2 J4015-3 3.4V +2% -2.5% 3.5V 9.0A 2.5A 5.5 to 8.0A 5V J4003-5 J4004-1 J4008-1 J4009-1 J4016-1 J4016-2 ±3% 12VU J4003-3 J4003-4 5.1V 12.0V 4.5A 1.0A ±5% 4.0 to 8.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 3.3 Protection Mechanism The machine is designed to automatically turn off the output of DC power as soon as the over-current protection circuit of the DC power supply PCB turns on. When the over-current detection circuits a high level of current, the machine will stop outputs [1], [2], and [3]; in other words, the over-current detection circuit 1 is arranged at an upper level of detective circuitry, and its activation will turn off all outputs located under it.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS Detection by Overcurrent detection circuit 1 Overcurrent detection circuit 2 Overcurrent detection circuit 3 Machine operation Resetting Stops outputs [1], [2], and [3] Turn off the main power switch, of the DC power supply and remove the cause; then, PCB. leave the machine alone for about 3 min, and turn on the main power switch. Stops outputs [1] and [2] of Remove the cause, and turn off the DC power supply PCB. and then on the control panel power switch.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 4. Others 4.1 Silent Mode In silent mode, the revolution of the laser scanner motor is reduced (1/2) to lower the machine’s operating noise when it is in standby state. (The time interval used by the machine to shift to silent mode is set in user mode.) The machine has to wait until the revolution of the laser scanner motor returns from silent mode to normal, taking a while longer than otherwise before it starts printing. 7-12 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5. Disassembly and Assembly The machine’s mechanical characteristics and features are as described herein, and the machine may be disassembled or assembled as instructed while keeping the following in mind: 1. The power plug must be disconnected for the work. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, the machine may be assembled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it. 3. The screws must be identified by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.1.1 External Covers Remove the external covers for cleaning, inspecting, and repairing the inside of the machine. Those covers that may be detached without difficult are omitted from the discussions; the number in parentheses indicates the number of mounting screws used.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.1.2 Removing the Front Cover 1) Open the front cover [1], and remove the screw [3] of the door tape [2]. 2) Remove the stopper [4], and detach the hinge shaft [5] by pulling it up. 3) Pull the front door up at an angle to detach. [5] [4] [3] [2] [1] F07-501-03 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.2 Arrangement of Electrical Parts (rear of the machine) The following shows the arrangement of the electrical parts found on the back of the machine (after removing the following four parts): • • • • main controller box assembly (p. 7-22P) DC controller PCB (p. 7-46P) waste toner bottle (p. 7-33P) high-voltage PCB (p.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS [1] Manual feed pickup drive clutch (CL3) [2] Main motor (M2) [3] Developing clutch (CL1) [4] Drum motor (M1) [5] Waste toner drive assembly [6] HDD [7] Left deck pull-out drive assembly • Left deck pull-out clutch (CL4) [8] Feeding fan (FM1) [9] Left deck pickup motor (M24) [10] Left deck pickup releasing solenoid (SL7) [11] Left deck lifter drive assembly • Left deck lifter motor (M4) • Left deck level sensor upper/lower (PS49, PS50) [12] Power supply transformer [13] Cas
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.3 Control Panel 5.3.1 Removing the Control Panel [2] 1) Remove the reader left/right/front cover. 2) Open the front cover, and slide out the pickup feeding unit to the front. 3) Remove the three screws [1], and detach the front door switch cover [2]. [1] F07-503-01 4) Remove the five screws [3], and disconnect the connector [4]; then, detach the control panel [5]. [3] [5] [4] [3] F07-503-02 5.3.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 3) Remove the nine screws [5], and detach the control panel shielding plate [6]. [5] [5] [5] [5] [6] [5] F07-503-04 4) Disconnect the six connectors [7], and remove the two flexible cables [8] and the three screws [9]; then, detach the control panel control PCB [10]. [7] [9] [9] [10] [7] [8] [8] F07-503-05 5) Remove the insulating sheet [11], and remove the nine screws [12]; then, detach the keypad PCB [13].
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.3.3 Removing the Touch Panel 1) Perform steps 1) through 3) used to remove the control panel control PCB to detach the control panel shielding plate. 2) Remove the four cable clamps [1], the grounding screw [2], and the two screws [3]; then, detach the touch panel shielding plate [4]. [4] [3] [1] [1] [3] [2] F07-503-07 3) Disconnect the connector [5], and remove the two flexible cables [6] and the four screws [7]; then, detach the touch panel unit [8].
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.4 PCBs 5.4.1 DC Controller PCB 1) Remove the rear upper cover. 2) Disconnect the 26 connectors, and remove the seven screws [1]; then, detach the DC controller PCB [2]. [1] [2] [1] F07-504-01 Keep the following three points in mind when replacing the PCBs: • Be sure to transfer the six EEP-ROMs from the old to new PCBs; at that time, be sure to refer to the color of each round label attached to the EEP-ROM for correct transfer.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.4.2 Main Controller Box and the Main Controller PCB 1) Remove the rear upper cover. 2) Remove the right rear upper cover. 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the controller cover [2]. [2] [1] F07-504-03 4) Remove the five screws [3], and slide out the main controller box [4]. 5) When removing the main controller box [4], disconnect all connectors of the main controller PCB in advance. 6) Remove the two screws [5], and detach the two PCB guides [6].
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.4.3 Power Supply PCB 1) Remove the left lower cover. 2) Remove the seven screws [1], and detach the shielding plate [2]. [1] [1] [2] F07-504-06 3) Remove the 11 screws [3], and detach the power supply cover [4]. [3] [3] [4] [3] F07-504-07 4) Disconnect the 15 connectors, and remove the two screws [5]; then, detach the power supply PCB [6]. [5] [6] F07-504-08 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.4.4 High-Voltage Power Supply PCB 1) Remove the rear lower cover. 2) Remove the five screws [1], and disconnect the nine connectors; then, detach the high-voltage power supply PCB [2].
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.4.5 Accessories Power Supply PCB 1) Remove the rear lower cover and the left lower cover. 2) Remove the six screws [1], and disconnect the six connectors [2]; then, detach the power cord base [3]. [1] [2] [2] [1] [3] [1] [1] F07-504-10 3) Remove the three screws [4], and disconnect the two connectors [5]; then, detach the accessories power supply PCB [6]. [5] [4] [6] [4] F07-504-11 5.4.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.4.7 Motor Driver PCB 1) Remove the right rear lower cover/rear lower cover, and detach the waste toner bottle. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the PCB cover [2]. [2] [1] F07-504-13 3) Remove the six screws [3], and disconnect the 11 connectors; detach the motor driver PCB [4]. [4] [3] [3] F07-504-14 5.4.8 Anti-Rush Current PCB 1) Remove the DC controller PCB.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.4.9 Serial Number PCB 1) Remove the DC controller PCB. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the fixing assembly terminal base [3]. 3) Remove the four screws [4], and disconnect the connector [5]; then, detach the serial number PCB [6]. [4] [5] [6] [3] [2] [1] [1] F07-504-16 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.5 Fans 5.5.1 Exhaust Fan 1) Remove the rear lower cover. 2) Remove the three screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the exhaust fan duct [3]. [3] [2] [1] F07-505-01 3) Remove the two screws [4], and disconnect the connector [5]; then, detach the fan grille [6] to detach the exhaust fan [7]. [4] [6] [7] [5] F07-505-02 5.5.2 Feeding Fan 1) Remove the DC controller PCB. 2) Remove the three screws [1], and detach the primary fan cover [2].
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.5.3 HDD Fan 1) Remove the rear upper cover and the reader rear cover. 2) Remove the HDD unit. (See p. 7-44P.) 3) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the HDD fan unit [3]. [3] [1] [2] F07-505-04 4) Remove the two screws [4], and detach the HDD fan [6] from the duct [5]. [4] [5] [6] F07-505-05 5.5.4 DC Power Supply Fan 1) Remove the power supply PCB.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.6 Drive System 5.6.1 Left Deck Drive Assembly 1) Remove the high-voltage power supply PCB. 2) Remove the four screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the left deck drive assembly [3]. [2] [1] [3] [1] [1] F07-506-01 5.6.2 Vertical Path Duplex/Right Deck Drive Assembly 1) Remove the waste toner bottle holder. 2) Remove the the five screws [1], and detach the grip base [2].
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.6.3 Main Motor Drive Assembly 1) Loosen the belt tensioner [1], and detach the main motor belt [2]. 2) Loosen the screw [3] to release the belt tensioner [4]; then, detach the belt [5]. 3) Remove the screw [6], and detach the fixing member [7]. 4) Remove the five screws [8], and disconnect the connector [9]; then, detach the main motor drive assembly [10]. [9] [2] [1] [8] [8] [5] [8] [4] [3] [10] [8] [6] [7] F07-506-04 5.6.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.6.5 Waste Toner Drive Assembly 1) Remove the DC controller base. 2) Remove the flywheel, and loosen the belt tensioner to detach the main motor belt. 3) Remove the waste toner bottle holder. 4) Remove the three screws [1], and detach the waste toner drive assembly [2]. [1] [2] [1] F07-506-07 5.6.6 Left Deck Pull-Out Roller Drive Assembly 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Remove the DC controller base. Remove the feeding fan. (See p. 7-28P.) Remove the waste toner bottle holder.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.6.8 Waste Toner Bottle Assembly, Lifter Drive Assembly, Vertical Path Drive Assembly, and Cassette Pickup Drive Assembly 1) Remove the main controller box. 2) Remove the right rear lower cover, rear lower cover, and waste toner bottle. 3) By referring to step 3) for the main motor, remove the main power switch base out of the way. 4) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the two connectors [2]; then, detach the connector base [3].
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 7) Remove the two screws [8], and detach the cassette pickup motor [9]. [8] [9] [8] F07-506-13 8) Remove the three screws [10], and disconnect the two connectors [11]; then, remove the lifter drive assembly [12]. [10] [11] [12] [10] F07-506-14 9) Remove the three screws [13], and detach the vertical path drive assembly [14]. 10) Remove the cassette 3/4 pickup assembly. (See p. 5-55P.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.6.9 Left Deck Lifter Drive Assembly 1) Remove the high-voltage power supply PCB. 2) Remove the three screws [1], and disconnect the two connectors [2]; then, detach the left deck lifter drive assembly [3]. [2] [1] [3] [1] [1] F07-506-16 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.7 Motor 5.7.1 Vertical Path Lower Motor (M27) 1) Remove the right lower cover/rear lower cover. 2) Remove the waste toner box. 3) Remove the four screws [1], and disconnect the connector; then, detach the vertical path lower motor [2]. [2] [1] [1] F07-507-01 5.7.2 Main Motor (M2) 1) Remove the main controller box. 2) Remove the right rear lower cover.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.7.3 Vertical Path Duplex Motor (M25), Vertical Path Upper Motor (M26), Deck Right Motor (M11), Lifter Right Motor (M5), and Cassette Pickup Motor (M12) 1) Remove the main controller box. 2) Remove the right rear lower cover, rear lower cover, an waste toner bottle. 3) By referring to step 3) for the main motor, remove the main power switch base out of the way. 4) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the two connectors [2]; then, detach the connector base [3].
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 9) Remove the four screws [15], and disconnect the 11 connectors; then, detach the motor driver PCB [16] together with its base. [15] [16] [15] F07-507-07 10) Remove the two screws [17], and detach the cassette pickup motor [18]. [17] [18] [17] F07-507-08 5.7.4 Pre-Registration Motor (M17) and Drum Motor (M1) 1) Remove the reader rear cover, rear upper cover, and right rear upper cover. 2) Remove the main controller box. 3) Remove the E-ring [1] and bushing [2].
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 6) Disconnect the two connectors [8], and remove the four screws [9]; then, detach the drum motor [10]. [8] [10] [9] [9] F07-507-10 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.8 Solenoid 5.8.1 Right Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid (SL6) 1) Remove the left deck drive assembly. 2) Remove the waste toner bottle holder. 3) Remove the three screws [1], and detach the cable support base [2]. [1] [2] F07-508-01 4) Remove the two screws [3], and detach the right deck pickup roller releasing solenoid [4]. [4] [3] F07-508-02 5.8.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.8.3 Right Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid (SL7) 1) Remove the high-voltage power supply PCB. 2) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the pickup roller releasing solenoid [3]. [3] [2] [1] F07-508-04 5.8.4 Adjusting the Position of the Left Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL7) When replacing the solenoid on its own, be sure to mount it in its initial position.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.9 Clutches 5.9.1 Manual Feed Pickup Clutch/Developing Clutch 1) Remove the reader rear cover/rear upper cover/right rear upper cover. 2) Remove the main controller box. 3) Remove the grip ring [1] and bushing [2]; then, disconnect the connector [3], and remove the two screws [4], and detach the manual feed pickup clutch (CL4) [5]. 4) Remove the two screws [6], and detach the flywheel [7].
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.10 Sensors 5.10.1 Cassette 3/4 Paper Size (width/length) Sensor 1) Remove the exhaust fan duct. 2) If the cassette 4 sensor is to be removed, remove the two screws [1], disconnect the two connectors [2], and detach the connector base [3].
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.11 HDD Points to Note When Replacing the HDD 1. Take care to avoid damage by static charge. 2. Keep the HDD unit from impact. 1) Remove the rear upper cover and the reader rear cover. 2) Remove the three screws [1], and detach the cover [2]. [2] [1] F07-511-01 3) Remove the two screws [3], and disconnect the two connectors ; then, remove the HDD unit [4]. [4] [3] F07-511-02 7-44 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 4) Remove the six screws [5], and detach the HDD [6]. [5] When mounting the HDD unit, be sure that the flat cable is under the plastic sheet of the HDD upper case. [5] [6] [5] [5] F07-511-03 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.12 Others 5.12.1 DC Controller PCB Base 1) Remove the HDD unit. (See p. 7-44P.) [1] [1] When mounting the HDD unit, be sure that the flat cable is under the plastic sheet of the HDD upper case. [1] 2) Remove the nine screws [1], and disconnect the 26 connectors; then, detach the DC controller PCB base. [1] [1] [1] F07-512-01 5.12.2 Relay 1) Remove the rear upper/lower cover and left upper/lower cover.
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS AND CONTROLS 5.12.3 Power Supply Transformer 1) Remove the high-voltage power supply PCB. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the two connectors [2]; then, slide the transfer unit [3] to the left to detach. [2] [3] [1] F07-512-03 3) Remove the two screws [4], and disconnect the connector [5]; then, detach the transformer [6]. [4] [6] [4] [5] F07-512-04 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 1. Paper Deck 1.1 Inputs to and Outputs from the Deck Driver 1.1.1 Inputs to the Driver (1/2) Deck driver PCB +5VR Deck pickup sensor PS101 J10-1 -2 -3 J8-5 -4 -3 J05-5 -4 -3 J5-1 -2 -3 J4-4 -3 -2 J04-7 -6 -5 J6-1 -2 -3 J4-7 -6 -5 J04-10 -9 -8 J7-1 -2 -3 J4-10 -9 -8 J04-13 -12 -11 DPPD When paper is detected, '1'. +5VR Deck paper sensor PS102 DPE* When paper is absent in the deck, '1'.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 1.1.2 Outputs from the Deck Driver (2/2) Deck driver PCB SW100 Deck open switch LED100 Deck open indicator J3-1 J04-4 -2 -3 -3 -2 -4 -1 Open switch PCB SW101 Deck open detecting switch J26-3 J10-1 -2 -3 NO DOPN* +5VR When the deck is opening/closing, '0'. (LED turns on or flashes while the +24VU deck lifter is rotating.) DOLON* DOPD When the deck is open, '1'. (SW101 is not pushed.) DLLD When the deck lifter is at the lower limit, '1'. (SW102 is not pushed.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 1.1.3 Outputs form the Deck Driver (1/1) Deck driver PCB J01-1 Deck main motor M101 +24V -3 DMMB* DMMA -4 -5 -6 Deck lifter motor J22-1 J17-9 J08-9 -2 -10 -10 J13-2 J8-11 J05-11 CL102 -1 -12 -12 SL101 J9-2 -1 J8-1 -2 J05-1 -2 M102 DMMB -2 See p. 8-14P. +24V DMMA* See p. 8-15P. 24VU Deck pickup clutch DPUCD* When '0', ON. 24VU Deck pickup roller releasing solenoid DPRSD* When '0', ON.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 1.2 Pickup 1.2.1 Outline The paper deck (hereafter deck) is capable of accommodating as many as 3500 sheets of paper (A/LTR/B5; of 80 g/m2), and is designed to feed paper in response to control signals from the DC controller of its host machine. The lifter of the deck is driven by the deck lifter motor (M102), and paper is picked up and fed using the drive from the deck main motor (M101). 1.2.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK DC controller PCB (host machine) Deck pickup roller releasing solenoid drive signal (DPRSD*) Deck main motor drive signal Deck pickup clutch drive signal (DPUCD*) Deck pickup detection signal (DPPD) Deck feed detection signal (DPFD) Deck driver PCB PS106 M101 PS101 CL102 SL101 F08-102-01 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 1.2.3 Sequence of Operations (pickup from the deck) Start key ON INTR SCAN PRINT LSTR STBY Deck main motor (M101) Deck pickup clutch (CL102) Deck pickup roller releasing solenoid (SL101) Deck pickup sensor (PS101) Deck feed sensor (PS106) F08-102-02 8-6 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 1.3 Detecting Paper in the Deck 1.3.1 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Power The presence/absence of paper inside the deck is detected by the deck paper sensor (PS102). When paper runs out and, as a result, the paper detecting lever of the pickup roller assembly moves past the deck paper sensor, the Add Paper message will be indicates in the control panel of the host machine.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 1.3.3 Detecting the Level of Paper in the Deck The machine uses the deck paper supply position sensor (PS107), deck paper level sensor (PS108), and deck paper sensor (PS102) to check the level of paper inside its compartment; it can also indicate the detected level in the control panel of its host machine.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 1.4 Deck Lifter 1.4.1 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper The lifter of the deck is connected to a reel by means of a cable, and is driven by the drive of the deck lifter motor (M102). The lifter is moved up or down by changing the direction of motor rotation. When the compartment is slid into the deck, the deck OPEN detecting switch is pushed; then, the lifter moves up as soon as the deck OPEN sensor (PS109) detects the light-blocking plate.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK Deck OPEN Deck lifter position detecting switch sensor (PS104) (SW101) Deck paper supply Deck open switch Deck liter upper Deck main position sensor (PS107) (SW100) M101 limit sensor motor Deck pickup roller (PS103) Deck paper level sensor (PS108) Deck pickup /feed roller M102 Deck separation roller Deck lifter motor Deck lifter cable Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch (SW102) Lifter Copy paper F08-104-01 8-10 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 1.4.2 Indicating the Level of Paper on the Deck Front Cover The drive of the deck lifter motor (M102) is received by a coupling, and is then transmitted to the rack through a drive belt. The rack is equipped with a black belt, moving up and down within the display window in the deck front cover in keeping with the movement of the rack.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 1.5 Opening/Closing the Compartment 1.5.1 Opening/Closing the Compartment When the deck open switch (SW100) is pushed, the deck open solenoid (SL102) turns on to release the compartment, which is then pushed forward several centimeters to the front by the force of a spring. At the same time, the deck lifter motor (M102) starts to rotate, and the lifter inside the deck starts to move down.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 1.5.2 Sequence of Operations (opening/closing the compartment) Deck open switch ON Compartment set ON Flashing OFF Deck open indicator (LED100) Deck lifter motor (M102) Deck paper supply position sensor (PS107) Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch (SW102) Deck open solenoid (SL1020) Compartment open Deck open detecting switch (SW101) Deck open sensor (PS109) Deck lifter position sensor (PS104) Deck lifter DOWN Deck lifter UP * : Varies depending on the size of the stack.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 1.6 Controlling the Deck 1.6.1 Controlling the Deck Main Motor (M101) The deck main motor is a stepping motor controlled by the DC controller of the host machine. The following figure shows the circuit used to drive the deck main motor, and has the following functions: [1] Turing on and off the deck main motor. [2] Changing the speed of rotation of the deck main motor a.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 1.6.2 Controlling the Deck Lifter Motor (M102) The deck lifter motor control circuit is located on the deck driver PCB. (See F08-106-02 for its block diagram.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK Deck open detection signal (DOPD) Communication conversion IC (Q16) 24V Deck open detecting switch (SW101) M102 Deck lifter motor DOWN drive signal Deck lifter motor UP drive signal DC controller PCB 24V 24V Deck lifter motor Motor drive circuit Deck open signal (DOPN*) Deck lifter upper limit detection signal (DLUL) Deck open detection signal (DOPND*) Combination Deck lifter position circuit detection signal (DLPD) Deck lifter motor drive signal (DLMON*) Deck lifter UP si
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 2. Detecting Jams 2.1 Outline The paper deck is equipped with two sensors used to see if paper is moving properly. A jam is identified in relation to the output of the sensors at such times as programmed in the DC controller of the host machine. When the DC controller of the host machine identifies a jam, the machine will discharge all sheets moving ahead of the jam and then stop operation, at which time it will show instructions on jam removal in the control panel of its host machine.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK The DC controller of the host machine identifies a jam under the following conditions: 1. When the host machine is turned on, or at the end of wait-up or in standby, paper exits over the deck feed sensor (PS106). • Deck Pickup/Vertical Path Delay Jam Start key ON INTR Jam indicator ON SCAN PRINT Deck pickup clutch (CL102) Jam check Deck pickup sensor (PS101) Deck feed sensor (PS106) Deck main motor (M101) Normal Error F08-201-02 8-18 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 3. Disassembly and Assembly Be sure to observe the following when disassembling or assembling the machine: 1. Disconnect the power plug of the host machine before starting the work. 2. Unless otherwise noted, assemble the machine by reversing the steps used to disassemble it. 3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location. 4. Some mounting screws are equipped with a toothed washer to protect against static electricity. Be sure to use each washer. 5.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 3.1 External Covers [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Deck releasing grip Front upper cover Compartment open/close switch Front cover Right cover Upper cover Rear cover [7] [1] [2] [6] [3] [5] [4] F08-301-01 [2] 3.1.1 Removing the Front Cover 1) Disconnect the deck from its host machine; then, push down the latch plate [2] of the compartment [1] with your finger to open the compartment [1]. (rear) [1] F08-301-02 8-20 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 2) Loosen the four screws [3], and detach the front cover [4] to the front. [3] [4] F08-301-03 When mounting the front cover to the deck, be sure to match it against the coupling for the paper level indicator. Match. F08-301-04 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK When mounting the front cover, be sure that the gap between the front cover and the front upper cover is 3±1 mm.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK [1] 3.1.2 Removing the Rear Cover 1) Disconnect the deck from the host machine, and remove the six screws [1]; then, detach the rear cover [2]. [1] [2] [1] F08-301-07 3.1.3 Removing the Right Cover [2] 1) Remove the three screws [1]; then, shift the right cover [2] to the front, and detach it to the rear. [1] F08-301-08 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 3.1.4 Removing the Upper Cover [2] 1) Remove the rear cover. (See p. 8-23P.) 2) Push down the latch plate [2] of the compartment [1] with your finger to open the compartment [1]. (rear) [1] F08-301-09 3) Remove the three screws [3], and disconnect the connector [4]; then, remove the front upper cover [5]. [3] [4] [5] F08-301-10 4) Close the deck vertical path assembly, and remove the two screws [6]; then, detach the upper cover [7].
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 3.2 General Descriptions 3.2.1 Disconnecting the Deck from the Host Machine [2] about 8 cm 1) Place a stack of copy paper [3] (about 8 cm in height) on the floor for the deck [2] to prevent deforming the roll support plate [1]. [3] [3] [1] F08-302-01 2) Remove the right cover. (See p. 8-23P.) COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 3) Remove the four screws [5], and detach the deck [6] from the deck base [7]. (left) [5] [7] [6] (right) [5] F08-302-02 4) Holding the deck [8] as shown, place it on the stack of paper prepared in step 1. [8] F08-302-03 8-26 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 3.2.2 Removing the Compartment [2] about 8 cm 1) Place a stack of copy paper [3] (about 8 cm in height) on the floor for the deck [2] to prevent deforming the roll support plate [1]. [3] [1] [3] F08-302-04 2) Disconnect the deck from the host machine, and push down the latch plate [5] of the compartment [4] to open the compartment [4]. [5] (rear) [4] F08-302-05 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 3) Remove the screw [6] and the stopper plate [7], and pull out the compartment [8] to the front. [7] (left rear of the compartment) [6] [8] F08-302-06 4) Remove the right cover. (See p. 8-23P.) 5) Remove the screw [9] of the harness guide, and disconnect the connector [10]; then, remove the three screws [12] each (left, right) of the compartment rails [11]. Then, while lifting the compartment [8] slightly, detach it to the front.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 3.2.3 Changing the Deck Paper Size Configuration If the deck paper size configuration must be changed to suit the needs of the user, perform the following: 1) Open the compartment of the deck, and remove all paper. 2) If the lifter of the deck is up, turn on the host machine; then, push down the sensor lever [2] of the paper supply position sensor located inside the compartment [1] to move the lifter to its lower limit.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK [1] 3.2.4 Adjusting the Deck Registration [3] [2] If the left/right registration (0±1.5 mm) must be adjusted, perform the following: 1) Slide out the compartment, and adjust the position of the latch plate [1] of the deck open solenoid (SL102) using the two screws [2]. (At this time, use the index [3] on the latch plate as a reference.) (left rear of the compartment) F08-302-10 3.2.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 3.3 Drive Mechanisms 3.3.1 Removing the Deck Pickup Clutch (CL102) 1) Remove the deck pickup unit. (See p. 838P.) 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the E-ring [2]; then, remove the deck pickup clutch [3]. [1] When mounting the pickup clutch, be sure to engage the clutch with the stop ring [4]. In addition, be sure to hook the harness on the U-groove [5] of the guide. [3] [4] [2] [5] F08-303-01 3.3.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 3.3.3 Removing the Deck Lifter Motor (M102) 1) Open the compartment of the deck, and remove all paper. 2) Turn on the host machine; if the lifter of the deck is up, push the sensor lever [1] of the paper supply position sensor found inside the compartment with your finger to move the lifter [2] about 7 cm from the base plate of the compartment. Then, insert a hex wrench into the hole of the lifter drive shaft [3] to hold the shaft in place.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 3) Disconnect the compartment from the deck. (See p. 8-27P.) 4) Disconnect the connector [5], and remove the five screws [6]; then, detach the deck lifter motor unit [7]. [5] [6] [7] [6] F08-303-05 3.3.4 Removing the Lifter Cable (front of the deck) 1) Open the compartment of the deck, and remove all paper. 2) Remove the screw, and detach the paper rear end guide plate from inside the compartment.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 4) Remove the front cover of the deck. (See p. 8-20P.) 5) Remove the four screws [3], and detach the roll support plate [4]. [3] [4] F08-303-07 6) Remove the coupling shaft [5] and the E-ring [6], and detach the pulley cover [7]. 7) Remove the two screws [8], and remove the cable fixing plate [9] on the left; then, detach the lifter cable [10]. 8) Remove the two screws [11] and the cable fixing plate [12] on the right; then, detach the lifter cable [13].
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 3.3.5 Removing the Lifter Cable (rear of the deck) 1) Open the compartment of the deck, and remove all paper. 2) Remove the screw, and detach the paper rear guide plate from inside the compartment. 3) Push the paper supply position sensor [1] found inside the compartment with your finger to move down the lifter until the left/right hole in the compartment side plate and the left/right hole in the lifer match; then, insert two long screwdrivers [2].
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 8) Insert a hex wrench [11] into the home in the lifter drive shaft [10] to hold it in place. [10] [11] If you failed to hold the lifter drive shaft as shown, the lifter cable will become slack when you move the lifter motor unit. F08-303-12 9) Remove the five screws [12], and detach the lifter motor unit [13]. [12] [12] [13] F08-303-13 8-36 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 3.3.6 Routing the Lifter Cable 1) Check to make sure that the lifter drive shaft and the lifter are held in place with a hex wrench [1] and long screwdrivers [2]. 2) Secure the cable fixing plate [3] to the lifter with two screws. 3) Hook the lifter cable on the pulley [4]. 4) Hook the ball of the lifter cable on the pulley [5] of the lifter drive shaft; then, wind the cable along the groove of the pulley about 1.5 times by hand. At this time, try to keep the lifter cable taut, i.e.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 3.4 Feeding Mechanisms 3.4.1 Removing the Deck Pickup Unit [1] 1) Remove the upper cover. (see p. 8-24P.) 2) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and remove the five screws [2]. 3) Remove the deck pickup unit [3]. [2] [3] [2] [2] F08-304-01 When mounting the deck pickup unit [3], be sure to secure the three screws shown. [3] Screws F08-304-02 3.4.2 Removing the Deck Pickup Roller [2] 1) Remove the deck pickup unit. (See p. 838P.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 3.4.3 Orientation of the Deck Pickup Roller When mounting the deck pickup roller [1] at the front of the machine, be sure that the marking [2] on the collar (silver) is toward the front and the marking [3] on the side of the roller is toward the rear of the machine.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 3.4.5 Orientation of the Deck Pickup/Feed Roller When mounting the deck pickup/feeding roller [1], be sure that the belt pulley [2] is toward the front of the machine. The pickup/feed roller rubber may be attached to the pickup/feed roller shaft in any orientation. [2] [1] F08-304-07 3.4.6 Removing the Deck Separation Roller 1) Disconnect the deck from the host machine; then, remove the two screws [1], and detach the separation roller support plate [2].
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK The urethane sponge used on the deck separation roller is pink when new, and changes to orange and yellow as time goes by. The change is accelerated particularly when it is exposed to light, and all this is a general characteristic of urethane sponge, not affecting its quality. Multiple parts do not exist distinguished by color. 3.4.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 3.4.8 Position of the Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid (SL101) Take note of the positions of the two fixing screws [2] of the solenoid with reference to the index on the support plate before removing the deck pickup roller releasing solenoid [1] from the support plate; or, mark the position of the solenoid on the support plate with a scriber. If the solenoid is to be mounted on its own, be sure to locate it in its initial position.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 3.5 Electrical Mechanisms 3.5.1 Removing the Deck Driver PCB [2] [3] [2] [1] 1) Disconnect the deck from its host machine; then, remove the six screws, and detach the rear cover. 2) Disconnect the eight connectors [1], and remove the four screws [2]; then, detach the deck driver PCB [3]. [2] F08-305-01 3.5.
CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK 2) Remove the three screws [3], and disconnect the connector [4]; then, detach the front upper cover [5]. [3] [4] [5] F08-305-03 3) Remove the two screws [6], and detach the open switch PCB [7]. [7] [6] When mounting the upper front cover, be sure to avoid biting the harness by the open switch PCB or forgetting to connect the connectors. F08-305-04 8-44 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 9 SHIFT TRAY COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 9 SHIFT TRAY 1. Specifications Item Method of stacking Mode of stacking Method of operation Stack size Weight of paper Offset Distance of offset Stack height Alignment Detection of limit Power supply Maximum power consumption Dimensions Weight Operating environment Description Remarks By tray lifter (using weight of paper, i.e.
CHAPTER 9 SHIFT TRAY 2. Names of Parts [10] [1] [5] [7] [3] [8] [2] [4] [9] [6] F09-201-01 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Tray Limit sensor (front) Limit sensor (rear) Tray drive unit Shift tray driver PCB 9-2 P [6] HP sensor (front) [7] HP sensor (rear) [8] Light-blocking plate [9] Tray paper sensor [10] Delivery unit COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 9 SHIFT TRAY 3. Outline of the Electrical Circuit 3.1 Shift Tray Driver PCB The shift tray driver PCB drives the shift motor in response to the shift control signal from the host machine, and provides the host machine with various sensor signals for control of shifting operations. Shift tray driver PCB A24V Shift motor M J101 J201 To host machine A5V J102 Motor drive circuit J202 Motor control signal To host machine Sensor signal Various sensors F09-301-01 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 9 SHIFT TRAY 3.2 Inputs to and Outputs from the Shift Tray Driver PCB Shift tray driver PCB HP sensor (front) HP sensor (rear) Tray paper sensor PS101 J203 -1 -2 -3 +5V J103 -6 -5 STHPR -4 PS102 J204 -1 -2 -3 +5V J103 -3 -2 STHPL -1 PS103 J206 -1 -2 -3 N.C. J205 -4 -1 -3 -2 -2 -3 -1 -4 +5V J104 -6 -5 SPEXIST* -4 When the tray is in HP at front, '1'. When the tray is in HP at rear, '1'. When paper is put on tray, '0' N.C.
CHAPTER 9 SHIFT TRAY 4. Outline of Operations 4.1 Shifting The machine shifts the tray to the front and the rear (over a distance of 55 mm) to sort (offset) sheets into groups. The tray is driven by a DC motor, and the rotation of the motor is converted into shifting motions by means of a rack and pinion gears. The stop position of the tray at the front and the rear is controlled by the HP sensors mounted to the front and the rear.
CHAPTER 9 SHIFT TRAY 4.3 Detecting paper The presence/absence of paper on the tray is detected by the tray paper sensor mounted on the tray. Tray paper sensor (PS103) F09-403-01 4.4 Delivery The sheets delivered by the host machine is moved through the delivery unit and then deposited on the tray. The delivery unit assembly is driven by the delivery motor through gears of the host machine’s delivery assembly. F09-404-01 9-6 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 9 SHIFT TRAY 5. Maintenance and Inspection 5.1 Adjusting the Limit Sensor Position Be sure to perform the following work if you have disassembled or replaced the limit sensor (front, rear). 5.1.1 Related Service Mode COPIER>FUNCTION>SNES-ADJ>STCK-LIMIT Use it to adjust the position of the limit sensor (PS104, PS105) of the shift tray. • ‘ON’ is indicated if either of the limit sensors (or both sensors) detects paper. • ‘OFF’ is indicated if neither of the limit sensors detects paper. 5.1.
CHAPTER 9 SHIFT TRAY 1) When adjusting the position of the limit senor (front, rear), be sure to start at the point farthest from the paper, moving closer to the sensor. 2) The grounding wire terminal of the limit sensor (front, rear) must be level in relation to the sensor as shown; in addition, make sure that the bend of the terminal must face downward. Grounding wire terminal F09-501-02 9-8 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 9 SHIFT TRAY 6. Disassembly and Assembly The machine’s mechanical characteristics and features are as described herein, and the machine may be disassembled or assembled as instructed while keeping the following in mind: 1. The power plug must be disconnected for the work. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, the machine may be assembled by reversing the steps used to disassemble it. 3. The screws must be identified by type (length, diameter) and location. 4.
CHAPTER 9 SHIFT TRAY 6.1 Removing the Shift Tray Driver PCB 1) Remove the shift tray from the machine. 2) Release the two retaining claws [1], and detach the cable retaining plate [2]. [2] [1] F09-601-01 3) Remove the two screws [3], and detach the two limit sensors [4] and the two grounding wires. 4) Free the cable of the limit sensor from the cable clamp [5], and disconnect the connector [6]. [4] [3] [6] [5] [4] F09-601-02 9-10 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 9 SHIFT TRAY 5) Remove the four screws [7] from the back of the shift tray, and remove the four shaft retainers [8]; then, detach the tray drive assembly [9]. [7] [8] [9] [8] F09-601-03 6) Pull off the shaft [10] from the tray drive assembly, and remove the three screws [11]; then, detach the shielding cover [12]. [11] [10] [12] F09-601-04 7) Remove the four screws [13], and detach the shift tray driver PCB [14].
CHAPTER 9 SHIFT TRAY 6.2 Removing the Tray Drive Unit 1) Perform steps 1) through 6) to detach the shift tray driver PCB. 2) Remove the two screws [15], and disconnect the connector [16]; then, detach the tray drive unit [17]. [15] [16] Points to Note When Mounting Be sure to adjust the position of the limit sensor (front, rear; see 5.1 “Adjusting the Limit sensor Position.”) [17] F09-602-01 9-12 P COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
TROUBLESHOOTING COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CONTENTS Contents CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 1. Periodically Replaced Parts ........... 1-1T 1.1 Guide to Timing of Replacement ............................. 1-1T 1.2 Reader Unit .............................. 1-1T 1.3 Printer Unit ............................... 1-2T 2. Consumables and Durables ............ 1-3T 2.1 Guide to Timing of Replacement ............................. 1-3T 2.2 Reader Unit .............................. 1-3T 2.3 Printer Unit ............................... 1-4T 2.
CONTENTS 3.3 Mounting the Drum Cleaning Blade ........................................ 3-8T 3.4 Mounting the Developing Blade ........................................ 3-8T 3.5 Replacing the Potential Sensor/ Potential Control PCB .............. 3-8T 4. Pickup/Feeding System .................. 3-9T 4.1 Orientation of the Deck/Cassette Pickup Roller .......................... 3-9T 4.2 Orientation of the Deck/ Cassette Separation Roller ...... 3-10T 4.
CONTENTS 8.5 Conversion Table for the Potential Control System ........ 3-37T 8.6 Emergency Measures for a Fault in the Potential Sensor ... 3-41T 9. Checking the Environment Sensor ........................................... 3-42T 9.1 Procedure ............................... 3-42T 9.2 Emergency Measure for a Fault in the Environment Sensor ..... 3-42T 10. Checking the Photointerrupters ..... 3-43T 10.1 Using a Meter ......................... 3-43T 10.2 Using Service Mode ............... 3-43T 10.
CONTENTS 4.1 Troubleshooting by Malfunction ............................ 4-20T 4.1.1 E000 ................................. 4-20T 4.1.2 E001 ................................. 4-20T 4.1.3 E002 ................................. 4-21T 4.1.4 E003 ................................. 4-21T 4.1.5 E004 ................................. 4-21T 4.1.6 E005 ................................. 4-21T 4.1.7 E010 ................................. 4-22T 4.1.8 E012 ................................. 4-22T 4.1.9 E013 .............
CONTENTS 4.2.22 Pickup fails (paper deck) ..................... 4-49T 4.2.23 The deck lifter fails to move up (side paper deck) ......... 4-50T 5. Troubleshooting Feeding Faults ... 4-52T 5.1 Paper Jams ............................. 4-52T 5.1.1 Pickup assembly .............. 4-53T 5.1.2 Separation/Feeding assembly .......................... 4-53T 5.1.3 Fixing/Delivery assembly .......................... 4-54T 5.1.4 Fixing/Delivery assembly (face-down delivery assembly) ......................... 4-55T 5.1.
CONTENTS 6. OPTION (settings mode) ............. 5-76T 6.1 COPIER ................................. 5-76T 6.2 FEEDER ................................ 5-92T 6.3 SORTER ................................ 5-92T 6.4 BOARD ................................. 5-93T 7. TEST (test print mode) ................. 5-94T 8. COUNTER (counter mode) .......... 5-98T CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS 1. Error Codes ................................... 6-1T 1.1 List of Error Codes ................. 6-1T 1.2 Self Diagnosis of the ADF ..
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 1. Periodically Replaced Parts Some parts of the machine must be replaced on a periodical basis to ensure a specific level of machine performance. (Once they fail, the consequences are likely to be considerable.) Whenever possible, schedule the replacement to coincide with a scheduled visit to the user’s. 1.1 Guide to Timing of Replacement You can check the timing of replacement for periodically replaced parts in service mode: COPIER>COUNTER>PRDC-1. 1.
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 1.3 Printer Unit No. Part name 1 Primary, pre-transfer, transfer, separation charging wire 2 Primary grid wire 3 Primary charging wire cleaner 1 4 Primary charging wire cleaner 2 5 Transfer charging wire cleaner 1 6 Transfer charging wire cleaner 2 7 Separation charging wire cleaner 8 Pre-transfer charging wire cleaner 9 Main thermistor 10 Sub thermistor 11 Ozone filter 12 Thermal switch Part No.
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 2. Consumables and Durables Some parts of the machine are likely to require replacement because of wear or damage once or more over the period of machine warranty. Replace them when they fail. 2.1 Guide to Timing of Replacement You can check the timing of replacement for durables in service mode: COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1. 2.2 Reader Unit The reader unit does not have parts that are classified as “consumables” or “durables.” COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 2.3 Printer Unit No.
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 2.4 Side Paper Deck No. Part name 1 Pickup roller (front) 2 Pickup roller (rear) 3 Feeding roller 4 Separation roller Part No. FF5-1220 FF5-1221 FF5-9779 FB2-7777-020 Q’ty 1 1 1 1 Life 250,000 250,000 250,000 250,000 As of June 2000 Remarks T01-204-01 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 3. Periodical Servicing 1. As a rule, provide periodical servicing very 250,000 prints. 2. Check with the Service Book before starting on a visit, and take parts for which replacement is expected. 3. If you cleaned any charging wire with solvent, be sure that it has dried completely before mounting it to the machine. As of June 2000 Work steps 1. Report to the person in charge: check the general condition. 2. Record the counter reading: check faulty prints. 3.
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Points to Note When Replacing/Cleaning the Charging Wires and Replacing the Charging Wire Cleaner 1. At the end of the following work, check to make sure that the charging wire is in the middle of the cleaner; otherwise, image faults can occur: a. If you have cleaned the charging wire; b. If you have replaced the charging wire and the charging wire cleaner; or c. If you have moved the charging wire cleaner by hand. Correct position Incorrect position 2.
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 8. Clean each filter by removing matter adhering to its surface: 1. ozone filter, 2. dustproofing filter. 9. Clean the developing assembly (developing assembly rolls). 10. Clean the pickup/feeding assembly: 1. transfer guide (upper/lower) plate, 2. registration roller (upper, lower), 3. feeding belt, 4. each feeding roller. 11. Clean the fixing/delivery assembly: 1. separation law (upper, lower), 2. each feeding roller, 3. inlet guide, 4. web (check), 5.
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 4. Periodical Servicing Chart Do not use solvents or oils other than those indicated. 4.1 Reader Unit : Clean Unit : Replace Part ×: Lubricate : Adjust : Inspect Intervals Upon every every every every installation 250,000 500,000 750,000 1,000,000 Scanner Scanner cable × Optical Scanner rail path Copyboard glass No. 1 through No. 3 mirrors Scanner reflecting plate Remarks Only at fist 250,000 (inpection/ adjustment). Silicone oil (FY9-6011) 4.
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Unit Part Intervals Upon every every every every installation 250,000 500,000 750,000 1,000,000 Charging assembly Charging wire cleaner (primary, pretransfer, transfer/separation) Grid wire (primary) Charging assembly shielding plate (each charging assembly) Roller electrode Primary antistray toner sheet Photosensi- Photosensitive tive drum drum Electrode (for slip ring of drum heater) Remarks Replace with charging wire simultaneously.
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Unit Part Intervals Upon every every every every installation 250,000 500,000 750,000 1,000,000 Developing Anti strayassembly toner sheet Cleaner Side scraper Toner dish (rear, front) Fixing Inlet guide assembly Web Oil dish Thermistor Sub thermistor Thermal switch Delivery Separation assembly claw (upper, lower) Waste toner Waste toner collection box area Pickup/ Transfer guide feeding Registration assembly roller (upper, lower) Feeding belt Feeding rollers Remarks
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 5. Points to Note for Periodical Servicing Unless otherwise instructed, clean with lint-free paper and alcohol. • Make a thorough check of the block (front, rear) for melting by leakage, deformation by heat, cracking, discoloration (yellowing). If a fault is found, replace the part with a new one immediately. • Check the block (front, rear) including its inside. • Do not use a cloth on which metal powder is found.
CHAPTER 1 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 6. Cleaning the photosensitive drum Do not rotate the magnet roll during work. Otherwise, waste toner may fall through the cleaner assembly. [3] CK-0429 [2] 1) Slide out the process unit. (Be sure to place the drum protective sheet over the fixing/feeding unit.) 2) Take out the photosensitive drum. 3) Moisten lint-free paper [1] with 5 to 10 cc of alcohol [2]; then, pour 0.2 to 0.3 g of drum cleaning powder (CK-0429) [3] on the lint-free paper.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT BASIC PROCEDURE COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT BASIC PROCEDURE 1. Making Pre-Checks Check the following: 1. Height of charging wire If a fault is found on copy images, Points to Note When Making Checks on the Printer Side The machine's potential control mechanism is designed for both copier image output and printer (PDL) image output, and its parameters for potential control in service mode may be adjusted independently of each other.
CHAPTER 2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT BASIC PROCEDURE 2. Making Checks on the Printer Unit (1/2) Checking Halftone Images Generate a halftone image. Generate a blank print.
CHAPTER 2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT BASIC PROCEDURE 3. Making Checks on the Printer Unit (2/2) Generate a solid black print. Is the density too low or too high (too light or too dark)? NO Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com A Generate a halftone image.
CHAPTER 2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT BASIC PROCEDURE 4. Making Checks on the Reader Unit Is there a difference in density between front and rear? NO Are there vertical lines in the images? YES NO Make a copy of the NA3 Chart in text mode. Is gray scale No. 1 (solid black) too light? NO Make a copy of the NA3 Chart in text mode.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 1. Image Adjustments 1.1 Standards of Image Position The image margin/non-image width of a print made in Direct must be as follows: 2.5±1.5mm 0 2 +1.5mm 4.0 - 1.0mm 4 6 8 10 F03-101-01 Image Leading Edge Margin F03-101-02 Left/Right Image Margin 2.5mm±1.5 0 2 4 6 +1.5mm 4.0 - 1.0mm F03-101-03 Leading Edge Non-Image Width 8 10 F03-101-04 Left/Right Non-Image Width COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 1.2 Checking the Image Position Make prints using the following as the source of paper (10 prints each), and check to see that the image margin and the non-image width are as indicated: • Each cassette • Front deck (left, right) • Manual feed tray • Duplex feeding unit • Side paper deck If not as indicated, adjust the image position in the following order: 1. Adjusting the left/right image margin (registration) 2. Adjusting the image leading edge margin (registration) 3.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 1.3.2 Left/Right Front Deck 1) Loosen the four screws [2] and the two fixing screws [3] of the cassette front cover [1]. [3] [2] [3] [2] [1] [2] F03-103-03 2) Move the cassette guide assembly (front) [4] to the front or the rear to make adjustments. [4] F03-103-04 1.3.3 Manual Feed Tray 1) Loosen the two mounting screws [1] of the manual feed tray, and adjust the position of the manual feed tray. [1] F03-103-05 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 1.3.4 Duplex Feeding Unit 1) Adjust the image margin as indicated using service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>FeedADJ>ADJ-REFE. Decreasing the ADF-REFE setting (A decrease by ‘ 23’ will ecrease the margin by 1 mm.) Edge of paper Increasing the ADJ-REFE setting (An increase by ‘ 23’ will increase the margin by 1 mm.) 2.5mm±2.0 0 2 4 6 8 10 F03-103-06 1.3.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 1.4 Adjusting the Image Leading Edge Margin 1) Adjust the image margin in service mode so that it is as indicated: COPIER>ADJUST>Feed-ADJ>REGIST. Decreasing the REGIST setting (A decrease by ‘10’ will increase the margin by 1 mm.) Edge of paper Increasing the REGIST setting (An increase by ‘10’ will decrease the margin by 1 mm.) F03-104-01 1.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 1.6 Adjusting the Leading Edge Non-Image Width 1) Adjust the non-image width in service mode so that it is as indicated: COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X. Decreasing the ADJ-X setting (A decrease by '12' will decrease the width by 1 mm.) Image leading edge Increasing the ADJ-X setting (An increase by '12' will increase the width by 1 mm.) F03-106-01 3-6 T COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 2. Scanning System 2.1 Replacing the Scanner Drive Cable See the Reader Manual: Chap. 2>5. “Disassembly/Assembly” 2.2 Adjusting the Position of the Scanner Mirror Base See the Reader Manual: Chap. 2> 5. “Disassembly/Assembly” 2.3 After Replacing the Scanning Lamp See the Reader Manual: Chap. 2>5. “Disassembly/Assembly” COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 3. Image Formation System 3.1 Routing the Grid Wire of the Primary Charging Assembly See the Printer Manual: Chap. 4>7.8 “Charging Wire” 3.2 Routing the Charging Wire of Charging Assemblies See the Printer Unit: Chap. 4>7.8 “Charging Wire” 3.3 Mounting the Drum Cleaning Blade See the Printer Manual: Chap. 4>7.11 “Drum Cleaner” 3.4 Mounting the Developing Blade See the Printer Manual: Chap. 4>7.8 “Developing Assembly” 3.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 4. Pickup/Feeding System 4.1 Orientation of the Deck/Cassette Pickup Roller The pickup roller may be mounted by reversing the steps used to remove it; however, be sure to keep the following in mind: • The pickup rollers used at the front and the rear of the machine are not interchangeable. • The collar of the pickup roller used at the front of the machine is gold-colored.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 4.2 Orientation of the Deck/Cassette Separation Roller When replacing the separation roller, be sure it is oriented as follows: Cassette 3/4, Right Pickup Assembly Left Deck Pickup Assembly Narrower groove Wider groove Narrower groove (rear of machine) (front of machine) Wider groove F03-402-01 4.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 4.4 Orientation of the Pickup Roller of the Side Paper Deck The pickup roller may be mounted by reversing the steps used to remove it; however, be sure to keep the following in mind: • The pickup rollers used at the front and the rear of the machine are not interchangeable. • The collar of the pickup roller used at the front of the machine is silver-colored.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 4.5 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Side Paper Deck When mounting the feeding roller assembly [1] to the side paper deck, be sure that the belt pulley [2] is toward the front of the machine. When mounting the feeding roller [3] to the feeding roller shaft [4], be sure that the round marking [5] is toward the rear of the machine. [5] [3] [4] [2] [1] (front) F03-405-01 3-12 T COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 4.6 Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation Roller of the Deck/Cassette If double feeding or pickup failure occurs during pickup, change the position of the pressure spring of the separation roller: • If double feeding occurs, move the hook of the spring in the direction of B. • If pickup failure occurs, move the hook of the spring in the direction of A.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 4.7 Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation Roller of the Manual Feed Tray If double feeding or pickup failure occurs during pickup, adjust the position of the pressure spring of the separation roller. 1) Remove the right upper cover. 2) Remove the upper guide [1]. [1] F03-407-01 • • If double feeding occurs, remove the mounting screw [2], and lower the mounting base [3]; then, tighten the mounting screw [2] in hole A.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 4.8 Adjusting the Fixing Inlet Guide Solenoid (SL1) Adjust the position of the solenoid using the two screws [1] so that the guide will be positioned as indicated when the solenoid turns on. 9.5mm 12.7mm Upper roller 3.2mm [1] Lower roller Inlet guide Solenoid F03-408-01 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 4.9 Adjusting the Position of the Pickup Solenoid (SL3, SL4) of the Cassette 3/4 Adjust the position of the solenoid using the two screws [3] so that the distance from the bottom of the pickup assembly to A of the roller arm is 36±0.5 mm when [1] and [2] are operated. [2] [1] [1] [2] A 36±0.5mm [3] View from A F03-409-01 3-16 T COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 4.10 Adjusting the Position of the Delivery Flapper Solenoid (SL5) Adjust the position of the mounting screw [2] using the screw [2] so that the drive lever [1] is pushed fully when the solenoid turns on (i.e., when the plunger is drawn). [1] [2] F03-410-01 4.11 Adjusting the Position of the Right Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL6) Adjust the position of the solenoid so that the left edge of the arm 2 is 57.2 ± 0.5 mm from the center of hole A of the solenoid mounting base.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 4.12 Adjusting the Position of the Left Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL7) Before removing the left deck pickup solenoid from the support plate [1], take note of its position with reference to the fixing screw [2] of the solenoid. Or, mark the position for the solenoid by drawing a line on the support plate with a scriber. When mounting the solenoid on its own, be sure to secure it in its original position. [1] [2] F03-412-01 4.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 4.14 Adjusting the Position of the Fixing Web Solenoid (SL9) 4.14.1 New Fixing Web Adjust the position for the solenoid using the screw [2] so that the distance of travel of the drive lever [1] is 8.6 mm. [1] [2] 8.6mm F03-414-01 4.14.2 Existing Fixing Web Before removing the solenoid, take note of the position [A] of the drive lever when the solenoid turns on.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 4.15 Position of the Side Paper Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid Before removing the deck pickup roller releasing solenoid [1] from the support plate, take note of the position of the two fixing screws [2] of the solenoid with reference to the index on the support plate. Or, draw a line on the support plate so that it will serve as a reference when positioning the solenoid. When mounting the solenoid on its own, be sure to secure it in its original position.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 4.17 Attaching the Drive Belt Attach the drive belt on the pulley and the rollers as indicated. Main drive belt Paper feed drive belt F03-417-01 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 5. Fixing System 5.1 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Heater 1) Do not touch the surface of the heater. 2) For both heaters, be sure that the side with the longer harness is toward the front. 3) Mount the main heater [1] to the right side and the sub heater [2] to the left side (viewing from the front of the fixing assembly). 4) Be user that the protrusions of the heaters will not interfere, i.e., stagger them.
, CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 5.3 Adjusting the Lower Roller Pressure (nip) 5.3.1 Taking Measurements Wait for 15 min after the machine ends its warm-up; then, make 20 A4 copies before starting the work: 1) Place A4 or LTR paper, and select A4 or LTR in the control panel. 2) Make the following selections in service mode to discharge the paper: COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIPCHK c Feeding direction b Center of paper a b : 7.8mm ± 0.5mm a-c : 0.5mm or less F03-503-01 5.3.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 6. Laser Exposure System 6.1 When Replacing the Scanner Unit If the temperature of the fixing assembly is 150°C or higher when the scanner unit is replaced, force potential control in service mode: 1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch. 3-24 T COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 7. Electrical Parts 7.1 When Replacing the CCD Unit 1) Replace the CCD unit. 2) After assembling the machine, connect the power plug to the power outlet, and turn on the main power switch. 3) Execute the following modes: CCD auto adjustment: COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ CCD edge gain correction position auto adjustment: COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>EGGN-POS 6) When the following data is updated (automatically), record them on the service label: COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>all items 7.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 7.3 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB 1) Replace the main controller PCB. 2) Remove the counter memory PCB from the existing PCB, and mount it to the new PCB. 3) After assembling the machine, connect the power plug to the power outlet, and turn on the main power switch. 7.4 When Replacing the HDD Unit When replacing the HDD unit, be sure to keep the following in mind: 1. Take appropriate measures against static charges. 2. Keep the HDD unit protected from impact.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 7.5 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB 1) 2) 3) 4) Print out the data of user mode/service mode. Replace the DC controller PCB. Remove the EEPROMs (6 pc.) from the existing PCB, and mount them to the new PCB. After assembling the machine, connect the power plug to the power outlet, and turn on the main power switch.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 7.6 When Replacing the High-Voltage PCB 1) Replace the high-voltage PCB. 2) After assembling the machine, connect the power plug, and turn on the main power switch. 3) Enter the values recorded on the label attached to the new high-voltage PCB in the following service mode items: COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP>HVT-DE COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>HVT-TR COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>H-PRE-TR COPIER>ADJUST>HV-SP>HVT-SP 3-28 T COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 8. Checking the Surface Potential Control System 8.1 Outline In the event of an image fault, it is important to find out if the cause is within the static latent image formation block (including the photosensitive drum and the potential control system) or is with the developing/transfer mechanism; and to isolate the cause, the surface potential must first be checked in service mode. 8.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 8.3 Zero Level Check A "zero level check" is a check made to find out whether the control system of the DC controller PCB identifies 0 V when the drum surface potential is 0 V.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 4) Open the front cover, and slide out the pickup feeding unit to the front. 5) Remove the three screws [3], and detach the front switch cover [4]. [4] [3] F03-803-02 6) Free the cable of the potential control PCB from the cable clamp, and disconnect the connector (4-pin) [5] connected to the DC controller PCB.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 11) Connect the connector of the cable (of the potential control PCB). 12) Mount the front switch cover, and close the front cover. 13) Mount the rear upper cover. 14) Turn on the main power switch. 8.3.2 Method 2 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Disable potential control so that the machine will be in non-auto control mode. Turn off the main power switch. Remove the potential sensor from the machine.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS Be sure to fit the clip [3] fully away from the sensor window, not letting it coming into contact with the cover of the sensor. 7) Insert the door switch tool into the door switch assembly. 8) Turn on the main power switch. Be sure not to touch the potential senor assembly after turning on the power switch. 9) Make the following selections in service mode, and check to make user that the reading during initial rotation is between 0 and 30: COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>DPOT-K.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS Blank Page 3-34 T COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 8.4 Checking the Potential System START Checking the Primary Output Checking the Laser Output NO A Is the image better? YES Turn off the main power switch. 1) Short CP106 and CP105 on the DC controller PCB. 2) Disconnect the connector (J9010) used to connect between the DC controller PCB and the potential control PCB. Turn on the main power switch. Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>DPOT-K.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS Checking the Transfer Output Enable potential control: COPIER> OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT=1 Is the toner image on the photosensitive drum before transfer normal? NO Replace the photosensitive drum. YES Measure the voltage DEV-DC-CNT during printing of J102A-8 on the DC controller PCB. Disable potential control: COPIER> OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT=0. Measure the voltage TR-CNT during printing of J102A-12 on the DC controller PCB.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 8.5 Conversion Table for the Potential Control System Control[V] Primary[µA] Developing bias[V] Pre-transfer[µA] Transfer[µA] Separation[µA] 3.00 1,400 0 0 440 100 3.05 1,391 3 -2 437 96 3.10 1,382 7 -4 434 92 3.15 1,373 11 -6 431 88 3.20 1,365 15 -8 429 85 3.25 1,356 18 -10 426 81 3.30 1,347 22 -12 426 77 3.35 1,338 26 -14 420 73 3.40 1,330 30 -16 418 70 3.45 1,321 33 -18 415 66 3.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS Control[V] Primary[µA] Transfer[µA] Separation[µA] 5.00 1,050 150 -82 330 -50 5.05 1,041 153 -84 327 -53 5.10 1,032 157 -86 324 -57 5.15 1,023 161 -88 321 -61 5.20 1,015 165 -90 319 -65 5.25 1,006 168 -92 316 -68 5.30 997 172 -94 313 -72 5.35 938 176 -96 310 -76 5.40 980 180 -99 308 -80 5.45 971 183 -101 305 -83 5.50 962 187 -103 302 -87 5.55 953 191 -105 299 -91 5.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS Control[V] Primary[µA] Developing bias[V] Pre-transfer[µA] Transfer[µA] Separation[µA] 7.00 700 300 -165 220 -200 7.05 691 303 -167 217 -203 7.10 682 307 -169 214 -207 7.15 673 311 -171 211 -211 7.20 665 315 -173 209 -215 7.25 656 318 -175 204 -218 7.30 647 322 -177 203 -222 7.35 638 326 -179 200 -226 7.40 630 330 -181 198 -230 7.45 621 333 -183 195 -233 7.50 612 337 -185 192 -237 7.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS Control[V] Primary[µA] Transfer[µA] Separation[µA] 9.00 350 450 -247 110 -350 9.05 341 453 -249 107 -353 9.10 332 457 -251 104 -357 9.15 323 461 -253 101 -361 9.20 315 465 -255 99 -365 9.25 306 468 -257 96 -368 9.30 297 472 -259 93 -372 9.35 288 476 -261 90 -376 9.40 280 480 -264 88 -380 9.45 271 483 -266 85 -383 9.50 262 487 -268 82 -387 9.55 253 491 -270 79 -391 9.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 8.6 Emergency Measures for a Fault in the Potential Sensor If transfer separation fails because of a fault in the potential sensor, try using the following service mode items to get around the problem; keep in mind, however, that this is no more than a temporary measure used until the replacement of the potential sensor: 1. COPIER>OPTION>TEMPO>F-POT-SW If the potential sensor has gone out of order and transfer separation faults occur as a result, enter '1'. 2.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 9. Checking the Environment Sensor 9.1 Procedure Check the environment sensor using the environment sensor tool to see that it operates normally. 1) Make the following selections in service mode, and obtain the following data: COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG. Data A TEMP: machine inside temperature (°C) data A1 HUM: machine inside humidity (%) data A2 2) Press the Reset key twice, and turn off the main power switch.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS 10. Checking the Photointerrupters The machine’s photointerrupters may be checked by means of a meter or service mode. 10.1 Using a Meter 1) 2) 3) 4) Set the meter range to 300 VDC. Connect the - probe of the meter to the GND terminal of the PCB to check. Connect the + probe of the meter to the terminals indicated. Make checks as instructed. 10.2 Using Service Mode 1) 2) Enter service mode, and select I/O.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS Printer Unit (service mode: COPIER>I/O>DC-CON) Sensor Connector No. Checks I/O I/O address PS2 D>J113-A14 display display Open and close the right lower cover. Cover Right lower cover open/closed sensor --PS3 D>J103-B14 Open and close the manual feed tray. Tray Manual feed tray open/closed sensor IO-P03-13 PS4 D>J106-B19 Claw jam sensor IO-P01-14 PS5 D>J112-B2 Put paper over the point of detection. Paper Open and close the right deck.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS Sensor Connector No. Checks I/O I/O address Voltage display display PS20 D>J115-A11 Put paper over the point of Left deck re-try sensor IO-P02-2 detection. PS21 D>J110-A8 Put paper over the point of Cassette 3 re-try sensor IO-P02-0 detection.
CHAPTER 3 STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS Sensor Connector No. Checks I/O I/O address Voltage display display PS38 D>J107-B16 Put paper over the point of Reversal sensor 2 IO-P02-7 detection. PS45 D>J106-B5 Put paper over the Fixing web length sensor IO-P02-12 sensor. PS46 D>J106-B2 Put paper over the point of Paper Web Paper Present 1 5V Absent 0 0V Present 0 0V Short 1 5V Present 1 5V Delivery assembly jam sensor IO-P06-2 detection.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/ MALFUNCTIONS COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 1. Making Initial Checks in the Event of an Image Fault 1.1 Site Environment The site must meet the following requirements: 1. The main source of power must provide the rated voltage. (The power plug must remain connected throughout the night.) 2. The site must not be subject to high temperature/humidity (near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier) or low temperature. It must not be near a source of fire, and must not be subject to dust. 3.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 1.5 Checking the Developing Assembly 1) Check to make sure that the rolls on both ends of the developing assembly are in contact with the drum. Otherwise, “light images” may occur. 2) Check to make sure that the surface of the developing cylinder is coated with an even layer of toner. Otherwise, “light images” or “uneven density” may occur. 1.6 Checking the Paper 1) Check to see if the paper is of a recommended type.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT BASIC PROCEDURE Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.com 2. Samples of Image Faults 4-4 T COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3. Troubleshooting Image Faults 3.1 The image is too light (halftone) AE adjustment 1) Make prints in AE mode. Is the density normal? YES: End. Developing assembly 2) Are the rolls of the developing assembly in firm contact with the photosensitive drum? YES: Check to see if the surface of the developing cylinder is coated with an even layer of toner. NO: Check to find out if the developing assembly locking unit is mounted correctly.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.2 The print is too light (including solid black area) 3.3 The print is too light (overall, appreciably) 1) Turn off the main power switch in the middle of printing. At this time, is the toner image on the surface of the photosensitive drum (before transfer) more or less normal? YES: The cause is in a process that follows transfer. Go to step 3).
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.4 The print has uneven density (darker at front) 3.5 The print has uneven density (lighter at front) Pre-exposure lamp 1) Does the pre-exposure lamp turn on at an even intensity across its length during printing? NO: 1. Replace the pre-exposure lamp. 2. Replace the DC controller PCB.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.6 The print is foggy (overall) Potential control system 1) Set ‘0’ to the following in service mode to turn off potential control: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PC-CNT> Is the problem corrected? YES: The cause is in the potential control mechanisms. Make checks according to the instructions for the potential control mechanism in Chapter 3 “Standards and Adjustments.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.7 The print if foggy vertically 3.8 The print has black lines (vertical, blurred, thick) Reader unit 1) Does the problem occur on copy images only? YES: The cause is in the reader unit. Check the following: 1. Scanning lamp for dirt and life 2. Reflecting plate, mirrors, lens, and glass for dirt 3.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.9 The print has black lines (vertical, fine) Reader unit 1) Does the problem occur only in copy images? YES: 1. Check the standard white plate and mirrors for dirt. 2. Execute the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ. Dust-proofing glass. 2) Clean the Dust-proofing glass. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. Fixing system 3) During printing, turn off the main power switch while paper is in the feeding assembly; then, check the image.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.10 3.11 The print has white spots (vertical) The print has white lines (vertical) Reader unit 1) Does the problem occur only in copy images? YES: The cause is in the reader unit. Check the following: 1. Standard white plate (back of copyboard glass) for dirt 2. Execute the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ. 3. Execute the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>SH-PS-ST. Fixing assembly 2) Generate test print TYPE [00].
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.12 The print has white spots (horizontal) Reader unit 1) Does the problem occur only in copy images? YES: 1. Check the scanner rail for foreign matter. 2. Check the scanner cable for tension Charging wire 2) Does the problem occur at even intervals? YES: Clean each charging wire. Developing assembly, Photosensitive drum 3) Does the problem occur at intervals of about 52 mm? YES: Check the developing assembly: 1. Clean the developing rolls. 2.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.13 The back of the print is soiled Transfer guide 1) Is the transfer guide soiled with toner? YES: 1. Clean the transfer guide. 2. Check the transfer guide bias. 3. Check the developing assembly for leakage of toner. Drum cleaner 2) Is the paper feeding assembly soiled with toner? YES: 1. Clean the feeding assembly. 2. Check the drum cleaner assembly for leakage of waste toner. Fixing assembly 3) Is the fixing assembly lower roller soiled? YES: 1.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.14 The print has fixing faults Copy paper 1) Is the paper of a type that has poor fixing performance (e.g., thick paper)? YES: Set ‘2’ (thick paper mode) in service mode: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FSPD-S. Perform the following, and advise the user: a. Set the source of paper (cassette, deck) to ‘Heavy’. Additional Function>common settings>store paper type>source of paper>‘Heavy’ b.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.15 3.16 3.17 The print has a displaced leading edge (appreciably large margin) The print has a displaced leading edge (large margin) The print has a displaced leading edge (no margin) Placement of originals 1) Is the original placed correctly? NO: Place the original correctly. Pickup assembly 2) Make prints using the following source of paper. Is the displaced leading edge different? 1. Let/right front deck 2. Cassettes 3. Side paper deck 4.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.18 The print has a blurred image Reader unit 1) Does the problem occur only in copy images? YES: Go to step 2). NO: Go to step 5). Scanner drive cable 2) While the scanner is moving, is the cable wound on the cable pulley in lengths laid on top of one another? YES: 1. Route the cable once again. 2. If the cable has a fault, replace it. Scanner drive belt 3) Is the belt too taut or too slack? YES: 1. Attach the belt properly. 2.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.19 The print is foggy (horizontally) 1) Make a copy in Direct. Does the problem occur in the same position? YES: Go to step 3). Reader unit 2) Does the scanning lamp flicker while the scanner is moving forward? YES: Check the scanning lamp and the inverter PCB. NO: Check the scanner drive system of the reader unit. Scanner, Feeding system (wobbling) 3) Make a reduced copy, and compare it against a copy made in Direct.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.21 The print is blank Reader unit 1) Does the problem occur only in copy images? YES: Check the connection of the following PCBs; if normal, replace the PCB. 1. CCD/AP PCB 2. DC controller PCB Primary charging assembly 2) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT. (Copier) Are the readings ± 6V of the ? (Printer) Are the readings ± 6V of the ? NO: 1. Check the primary charging assembly. 2.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 3.22 The print is solid black Reader unit/Printer unit (isolation) 1) Does the problem occur only in copy images? YES: Got to step 2). NO: Go to step 3). Scanning lamp 2) Is the scanning lamp on? NO: See “The scanning lamp fails to turn on.” YES: Check the connection of the following PCBs; if normal, replace the PCB. 1. CCDAP PCB 2. DC controller PCB Laser unit 3) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>MISC>LPOWER.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4. Troubleshooting Malfunctions 4.1 Troubleshooting by Malfunction 4.1.1 E000 Thermistor (TH1, TH2) 1) Clear E000, and turn off and then on the main power switch. Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG. Does show an increase in temperature? YES: The thermistor is faulty.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.3 E002 4.1.4 E003 General condition 1) Turn on the main power switch, and clear E002/E003. Then, turn off and then on the main power switch. Is the fixing heater operating? NO: See “The fixing heater fails to operate.” General condition 2) Is the connection of the connectors on the DC controller PCB and in the fixing assembly good? In addition, is the wiring from the thermistor to the DC controller PCB good? NO: Correct the connection/wiring.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Service mode 2) After replacing the fixing web, has the fixing web counter been reset in service mode (COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB) ? NO: Reset the counter. Fixing web length detecting lever. 3) Is the position of the web length detecting lever correct? YES: Correct the position of the lever. Fixing web length sensor (PS45), DC controller PCB 4) Is the fixing web length sensor normal? (See the instructions on how to check the photointerrupters.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Drum motor (M1), DC controller PCB 3) Turn on the main power switch, and measure the voltage of the connectors of the drum motor. Is it as follows? J602-2:5 V J602-3:5 V J602-1:0 V YES: Replace the drum motor. NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the DC controller PCB. 4.1.9 E013 Waste toner feedscrew (locked) 1) Is the waste toner feedscrew drive gear pushing the waste toner feedscrew lock detecting switch (MSW2)? YES: Connect the connector.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.11 E020 General condition 1) Is the developing assembly locking plate mounted correctly? NO: Mount the plate correctly. General condition 2) Is the shutter releasing member of the hopper mouth mounted correctly to the developing assembly locking plate? NO: It is likely that the inside of the hopper is clogged with toner. Remove and then mount back the shutter releasing member to remove the clog, or replace the hopper unit.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Laser unit, DC controller PCB 3) Try replacing the laser unit. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the DC controller PCB. 4.1.14 E100 BD PCB 1) Try replacing the BD PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. Laser output 2) Try replacing the laser unit. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. Laser scanner unit, DC controller PCB 3) Try replacing the laser unit. Is the problem corrected? YES: End.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Connector 2) Is the connector (J108) on the DC controller PCB connected correctly? NO: Connect the connector securely. Controller cooling fan (FM4), DC controller PCB 3) Try replacing the controller cooling fan. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the DC controller PCB. 4.1.17 E196 EEPROMs 1) If the EEPROMs (6 pc.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Scanner HP sensor (PS39), Reader controller PCB 2) Is the scanner HP sensor normal? (Check the instructions on how to check photointerrupters.) NO: Replace the sensor. YES: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the reader controller PCB. 4.1.19 E204 Wrong operation 1) Turn off and then on the main power switch. Is the problem corrected? YES: Check the operation once again; if normal, end the work.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS CCD unit, Reader controller PCB 2) Try replacing the CCD unit. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Check the wring; if normal, replace the reader controller PCB. 4.1.22 E240 Wiring 1) Is the wiring from the main controller PCB to the DC controller PCB normal? YES: End. DC controller PCB, Main controller PCB 2) Try replacing the DC controller PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the main controller PCB. 4.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.25 E302 Connectors 1) Are the connectors (J6001/J6002) on the CCD/AP PCB and the connectors (J5002/J5003) on the reader controller PCB connected securely? NO: Connect the connectors securely. CCD unit 2) Try replacing the CCD unit. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. Reader controller PCB, Main controller PCB 3) Try replacing the reader controller PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.27 E602 Wiring 1) Are the connection and the cable of the connector (J1017) on the main controller PCB and the connector (J1551) on the hard disk drive normal? NO: Correct the connection/cable. Hard disk drive (HDD), Main controller PCB 2) Try replacing the hard disk drive and downloading the system software. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the main controller PCB. 4.1.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.30 E710 a. E71-0001 Wrong operation, Reader controller PCB 1) Turn off and then on the power switch. Is the problem corrected? YES: Check the operation once gain; if normal, end the work. NO: Replace the reader controller PCB. b. E710-0002 Wrong operation, DC controller PCB 1) Turn off and then on the main power switch. Is the problem corrected? YES: Check the operation once again; if normal, end the work. NO: Replace the DC controller PCB. c.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS c. E711-0003 Wrong operation 1) Turn off and then on the main power switch. Is the problem corrected? YES: Check the operation once again; if normal, end the work. Connector, Remote diagnostic device PCB 2) Is the interface cable between the remote diagnostic device PCB and the main controller PCB normal? NO: Correct the cable. YES: Replace the remote diagnostic device PCB. 4.1.32 E712 Wrong operation 1) Turn off and then on the main power switch.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.1.34 E717 Connector 1) Is the remote diagnostic device PCB connected securely? NO: Connect it securely. Remote diagnostic device PCB, Main controller PCB 2) Try replacing the remote diagnostic device PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the main controller PCB. 4.1.35 E719 Connector 1) Is the coin vendor connected securely? NO: Connect the coin vendor securely.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Connectors, DC controller PCB 2) Is the connection of the connector (J1015) on the main controller PCB and the connector (J122) on the DC controller PCB normal? Further, is the cable between these connectors normal? NO: Correct the connectors/cable. YES: Replace the DC controller PCB. 4.1.38 E740 Wrong operation 1) Turn off and then on the main power switch. Is the problem corrected? YES: Check the operation once again; if normal, end the work.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Riser board, Main controller PCB 3) Try replacing the riser PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Replace the main controller PCB. 4.1.40 E742 Disabling the PCI slot in service mode (BOARD>PCI1-OFF through PCI3-OFF) can limit the occurrence of errors. Wrong operation 1) Turn off and then on the main power switch. Is the problem corrected? YES: Check the operation once gain; if normal, end the work.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS DC power supply fan (FM6), DC controller PCB 3) Try replacing the DC power supply fan. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the DC controller PCB. 4.1.43 E805 a. E805-0001 Foreign object 1) Is there a foreign object that hinders the rotation of the fan in the rotating mechanism of the heat discharge fan? YES: Remove the foreign object.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Fan (direction, mounting condition) 2) Are the orientation and the mounting of the primary charging cooling fan normal? NO: Mount the cooling fan correctly. Connector 3) Is the connector (J103) on the DC controller connected securely? NO: Connect the connector securely. Primary charging cooling fan (FM6), DC controller PCB 4) Try replacing the primary charging cooling fan. Is the problem corrected? YES: End.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.2.1 AC power is absent Power plug 1) Is the power plug connected to the power outlet? NO: Connect the power plug. Power source 2) Is there rated AC voltage present at the power outlet? NO: The problem is not in the machine. Advise the user. Leakage breaker 3) Has the leakage breaker located in the left bottom of the machine turned on (i.e.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Wiring, DC load, DC power supply PCB 3) Turn off the main power switch. Is the voltage between the following terminals on the DC power supply PCB as indicated when the power is turned on in about 3 min? Connector Output voltage Remarks J4014-1 to 5 3VA1 ± 3% J4017-1 to 5 3VA2 ± 3% J4003-7 3VA3 ± 3% J4015-1 to 3 3VB + 2%, - 2.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Right upper cover, Right lower cover 4) Are the right upper cover and the right lower cover closed fully? NO: Close the covers. If there is a gap, correct it. Pressure spring 5) Are the springs of the right upper cover and the right lower cover exerting pressure on the vertical path rollers 1, 2, 3, and 4? NO: Check the pressure springs.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.2.4 The lifter fails to move up (pickup from front deck) Gear, Lever 1) Remove the deck, and move up the lifter by hand. Does it move smoothly? NO: Check the gear and the lever. Spring, Lever 2) Push up the pickup roller releasing lever with a finger. Does the pickup roller move down? NO: Remove the pickup assembly, and check the springs and the lever.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Cassette latch 2) Is the movement of the cassette open button assembly normal? NO: Mount it correctly. Spring, Lever 3) Move up the pickup roller releasing lever with your finger. Does the pickup roller move down? NO: Remove the pickup assembly, and check the spring and the lever.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Manual feed pickup clutch (CL3) 5) Execute ‘code: 1’ by making the following selections in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>CL. Is the sound of the clutch operating heard? NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the clutch. Manual feed releasing solenoid (SL2) 6) Execute ‘code : 5’ by making the following selections in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>SL.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Pre-registration motor (M17) 5) Execute ‘code: 22’ by making the following selections in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>MTR. Does the motor operate? NO: Check the wiring and the motor driver PCB; if normal, replace the motor. DC controller PCB 6) Try replacing the DC controller PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. 4.2.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Wiring, Connector 3) Are the connection and the wiring of the connectors from J5004 on the reader controller PCB to J1014 on the main controller PCB normal? NO: Correct the wiring, and connect the connectors securely. Scanner motor (M3), Reader controller PCB YES: End. NO: Replace the reader controller PCB. 4.2.10 The pre-exposure LED fails to turn on Pre-exposure LED (LA1) 1) Press the Start key.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.2.12 The hopper stirring motor (M9) fails to operate General condition 1) Execute ‘code: 5’ (MTR-ON) in service mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>MTR). Does the motor operate? Hopper toner sensor (TS2) 2) Is bit 10 in service mode (COPIER>I/O>DC-CON>IO-P02) ‘0’, indicating the absence of toner? YES: If the hopper is adequately supplied with toner, replace the sensor.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 4.2.14 The drum heater fails to operate General condition 1) Open the front cover, and release the fixing/feeding unit. Is the end of the photosensitive drum warm? (Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum.) YES: The drum heater is normal. Environment switch 2) Is the setting of the environment switch located at the left bottom of the machine ‘ON” (powered at all times)? NO: Set it to ‘ON’.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Hopper toner sensor (TS2), DC controller PCB 2) Is bit 10 in service mode (COPIER>I/O>DC-CON>IO-P02) ‘0’, indicating the absence of toner? YES: Replace the hopper toner sensor. NO: Check the wiring; if normal, replace the DC controller PCB. 4.2.17 The Set Control Card message fails to turn on CC-IV 1) Can a print be made without inserting a control card? YES: Check to find out if the connector of the CC-IV has a short circuit.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Cassette pickup assembly 2) Is the lifter mechanism of the cassette normal? NO: Replace the lifter unit or the cassette pickup assembly. 4.2.21 The fixing heater fails turn on Fixing/feeding lock sensor (MSW3) 1) Is the fixing/feeding lock sensor mounted correctly? NO: Mount the fixing/feeding lock sensor correctly. YES: Replace the sensor. Thermal switch (TP1) 2) Connect the probes of the meter to both terminals of the thermal switch.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Deck pickup roller 3) Does the deck pickup roller rotate? YES: If the roller is soiled, clean it with alcohol. If it is deformed because of wear, replace it. Belt (displacement) 4) Is the belt used to transmit drive to the deck pickup roller attached correctly? NO: Attach the belt correctly. Gear 5) Is the drive from the deck main motor transmitted through the gear? NO: Check the gear.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch (SW102), Deck driver PCB 6) Is the voltage between J08-8 (+) and J08-7 (GND) on the deck driver PCB as follows when the deck is opened/closed? opened: 0V closed: 5V YES: Check the lever and the wiring; if normal, replace the switch. NO: Replace the deck driver PCB. COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 5. Troubleshooting Feeding Faults 5.1 Paper Jams Jams occurring in the machine may be grouped into the following by location: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Pickup assembly Separation/feeding assembly Fixing/delivery assembly Drum cleaning assembly Duplex reversing assembly Feeding assembly The troubleshooting procedures that follow are organized according to location; to find out the location and the nature of a jam, use service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>JAM).
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 5.1.1 Pickup assembly Pickup assembly 1) Is the print paper curled or wavy? YES: Replace the paper. Advise the user on the correct method of storing paper. 2) Try paper of a recommended type. Is the problem corrected? YES: Advise the user to use recommended paper.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Transfer/Separation charging assembly 6) Is the transfer/separation charging assembly mounted securely? YES: Check the transfer/separation charging assembly. 7) Are there burrs on the paper guide of the transfer/separation charging assembly? YES: Remove the burrs. 8) Is there foreign matter on the transfer/separation charging assembly? YES: Remove the foreign matter. Print paper 9) Try paper of a recommended type.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Nip 6) Is the lower roller pressure (nip) as indicated? NO: Adjust it. Web 7) Is the web taken up correctly? NO: Check the fixing cleaning assembly. 8) Move the plunger of the fixing web solenoid (SL9) by hand. Is the web taken up? NO: Check the fixing web drive assembly. Delivery assembly sensor lever 9) Does each sensor lever of the delivery assembly move smoothly? NO: Adjust it so that it moves smoothly.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Reversal flapper solenoid (SL8) 4) Does feeding reversal flapper move correctly? NO: Correct the position of the reversal flapper solenoid, or replace it. Reversal motor (M14) 5) Does the reversal motor (M14) rotate at the correct timing? NO: Replace the reversal motor (M14). 5.1.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Motor 4) Do the reversal motor (M14), duplex feeding left motor (M29), duplex feeding right motor (M18), and vertical path duplex motor (M25) rotate at the correct timing? NO: Replace the motor. COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 5.2 Feeding Faults 5.2.1 Double Feeding Separation roller 1) Is the separation roller deformed or worn? YES: Replace the separation roller. Spring NO: Replace the spring used to pull the separation roller. 5.2.2 Wrinkles Pickup assembly 1) Turn off the power while print paper is moving through the feeding assembly. At this time, is the print paper wrinkled? Or, is the paper askew? YES: Check the pickup assembly.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6. Arrangement and Functions of Electrical Parts 6.1 Clutches CL1 CL3 CL2 CL4 F04-601-01 6.1.1 Reader Unit The reader unit does not have a clutch. 6.1.2 Printer Unit Symbol CL Name Clutch Notation CL1 CL2 CL3 CL4 Function Drives the developing cylinder. Drives the registration roller. Drives the manual feed pickup roller. Drives the left deck pull-off roller. COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.2 Solenoids and Switches SL2 SL5 SL9 SL8 SW2 SL1 MSW2 MSW3 SL3 SL4 MSW1 SW1 SL6 SL7 SW4 SW3 F04-602-01 4-60 T COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.2.1 Reader Unit The reader unit does not have a solenoid or a switch. 6.2.2 Printer Unit Symbol SL Name Notation Function Solenoid SL1 Drives the fixing assembly inlet guide. SL2 Drives the manual feed pickup mechanism. SL3 Drives the cassette 3 pickup mechanism. SL4 Drives the cassette 4 pickup mechanism. SL5 Drives the delivery flapper. SL6 Drives the right deck pickup mechanism. SL7 Drives the left deck pickup mechanism.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.3 Motors M3 M15 M9 M10 M13 M6 M7 M16 M4 M8 M19 M18 M5 M29 M14 M20 M21 M17 M1 M2 M25 M26 M11 M24 M27 M12 F04-603-01 4-62 T COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.3.1 Reader Unit Symbol Name Motor Notation M3 Function Scanner motor M 6.3.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.4 Fans FM7 FM2 FM5 FM8 FM6 FM4 FM1 FM3 F04-604-01 4-64 T COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.4.1 Reader Unit The reader unit does not have a fan. 6.4.2 Printer unit Symbol Name Fan Notation FM1 FM2 FM3 FM4 FM5 FM6 FM7 FM8 Function Feeding fan Primary charging cooling fan Heat discharging fan Controller cooling fan De-curling fan DC power supply fan HDD fan Duplex feeding fan COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.5 Sensors PS23 PS25 PS48 PS47 PS50 PS49 PS26 PS13 SV1 SVR4 PS21 PS17 SV2 PS15 PS27 PS14 SVR5 PS22 PS18 SVR2 SVR3 PS16 PS43 PS40 PS39 PS24 PS28 PS7 PS32 PS8 PS19 PS6 PS11 PS5 PS12 PS20 PS10 PS9 F04-605-01 4-66 T COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS SVR1 PS3 PS31 PS34 PS30 PS38 PS33 PS37 PS2 PS29 PS4 PS35 PS45 PS36 PS46 F04-605-02 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.5.1 Reader Unit Symbol Name Notation Photointerrupter PS39 PS40 Function Scanner HP sensor Copyboard cover sensor SIZE Photosensor Original sensor PS43 6.5.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS Symbol SV Name Notation Photointerrupter PS31 PS32 PS33 PS34 PS35 PS36 PS37 PS38 PS45 PS46 PS47 PS48 PS49 PS50 Function Duplex horizontal registration sensor Right deck feed paper sensor Left deck feed paper sensor Duplexing paper sensor Internal delivery sensor External delivery sensor Reversal sensor 1 Reversal sensor 2 Fixing web length sensor Delivery jam sensor Right deck level sensor (upper) Right deck level sensor (lower) Left deck level sensor
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others LA2 H5 LA1 H6 H3 THM2 TS1 TS2 THM1 TP1 H1 H2 HU1 ELCB H4 F04-606-01 4-70 T COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.6.1 Reader Unit Name Lamp Notation LA2 Scanning lamp Heater H5 H6 Function Lens heater (standard in 100-V model) Mirror heater (standard in 100-V model) 6.6.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.7 PCBs 11 10 14 17 6 18 7 23 9 2 15 13 12 25 24 20 21 1 5 3 4 8 22 F04-607-01 4-72 T COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.7.1 Reader Unit Ref. 12 13 15 25 Name Reader controller PCB CCD/AP PCB Inverter PCB Fuse PCB Function Controls the reader unit/ADF. Drives the CCD/processes analog images. Controls the scanning lamp. Controls the mirror/lens heater. (standard in 100-V model) 6.7.2 Printer unit Ref. Name 1 DC controller PCB 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 14 17 18 20 21 22 23 24 Function Controls the power supply of the printer unit/finisher.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.8 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB Of the VRs, LEDs, and switches found on the machine, those used in the field are discussed: 1. Some LEDs have leakage current and emit dim light when off; this is a normal condition and must be kept in mind: 2.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.8.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.8.3 Reader Controller PCB 4 6 1 J5021 GND J5011 J5009 1 1 2 J5015 J5010 1 J5013 SW5001 7 J5014 J5005 A40 J5008 A1 J5004 B40 3 B1 J5002 1 1 J5007 1 J5012 J5006 4 4 1 6 1 3 5 J5001 2 1 1 F04-608-04 SW5001-1 Inch series. AB series ON: OFF: SW5001-2 Not used. Not used. 6.8.
CHAPTER 4 TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS/MALFUNCTIONS 6.8.5 HVT PCB J4506 J4507 J4508 1 J4505 3 J4504 VR4501 1 13 1 2 J4502 5 1 J4503 J4501 F04-608-06 6.8.6 Drum Heater Control PCB SW2001 J2001 ON 1 2 F04-608-07 ON: OFF: SW2001-1 controlled to 47°C controlled to 43°C (default) SW2001-2 Not used. Not used. For details of drum heater control, see 6. “Controlling the Drum Heater” in Chapter 4. COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE 1. Organization of Service Mode 1.1 Outline The screens in service mode are grouped into three: Initial screen, Level 1/Level 2 screen, and Level 3 screen. User screen ( )(2,8)( ) Reset key Initial screen Reset key Select an item. Level 1/Level 2 From Level 1/ screen Level 2 screen Select a Level 1 item at the top of the screen. Select a Level 2 item from the list.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE The machine’s service mode is divided into the following seven types: COPIER FEEDER DISPLAY Control display mode SORTER I/O I/O display mode ADJUST Adjustment mode BOARD FUNCTION Operation/inspection mode OPTION Settings mode TEST Test print mode COUNTER Counter mode F05-101-02 1.2 Starting Service Mode and Making Selections 1) Press the user mode key ( ) on the control panel. 2) Press the 2 and 8 keys at the same time. 3) Press the user mode key ( ).
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE 1.3 Ending Service Mode Press the Reset key once to return to the service mode Initial screen (F05-102-01). Press the Reset key twice to end service mode and to return to the User (standard) screen. If you used ADJUST, FUNCTION, or OPTION in service mode, be sure to turn off and then on the power switch after ending service mode. 1.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE 1.5 Basic Operations 1.5.1 Initial Screen COPIER Initial item FEEDER Touch to select an item SORTER BOARD F05-105-01 1.5.2 Level 1/Level 2 Screen Level 1 item Touch to select an item VERSION USER DPOT ACC-STS ANALOG Level 2 items CST-STS SENSOR Touch to select an item JAM MISC ERR ALARM-1 HV-STS F05-105-02 5-4 T COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE 1.5.3 Level 3 Screen Page number < 1/2 > Level 2 item DC-CON ready to accept a servicing/ copying operation. JAM: paper jam exists. SERVICE: service operation under way. WAITING: initial rotation or the like under way. DOOR: door open. COPYING: copying under way. ERROR: error exists. NO-TONER: toner absent WTNR-FUL: full of waste toner.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE 2. DISPLAY (control/display mode) 2.1 COPIER The following screen appears in response to COPIER>DISPLAY; for the items, see the pages that follow: VERSION USER DPOT ACC-STS ANALOG CST-STS SENSOR JAM MISC ERR ALARM-1 HV-STS F05-201-01 5-6 T COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>DISPLAY Indicates the PCB ROM versions of the machine and accessories. Indication xx: version number yy:R & D control number. DC-CON Indicates the ROM version of the DC controller PCB. R-CON Indicates the ROM version of the reader controller PCB. PANEL Indicates the ROM version of the control panel CPU PCB. FEEDER Indicates the ROM version of the feeder controller PCB. SORTER Indicates the ROM version of the finisher controller PCB.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>DISPLAY Indicates the User screen and items related to the user. LANGUAGE Indicates the language/paper size configuration used. Display xx (2 higher-order digits): country code yy (2 lower-order digits) : language code zz : destination code (00: CANON, 01: OEM) aa : paper size configuration code (00: AB, 01: Inch, 02: A, 03: all sizes) COUNTER Indicates the type of control of the software counter.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>DISPLAY RAM Indicates the size of the memory mounted to the main controller. (64 MB, 128 MB) NIB Indicates the connection of a network board. (0: none, 1: Etherboard, 2: Token-Ring, 3: both) LIPS-RAM Indicates the size of the memory mounted on the LIPS board. (xx MB) LIPS Indicates the connection of the LIPS board. (0: not connected, 1: connected) PS/PCL Indicates the connection of a PS/PCL board.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>DISPLAY Indicates the paper size of the cassette and the manual feeder. WIDTH-C3 Indicates the paper width of the cassette 3 in terms of paper size. WIDTH-C4 Indicates the paper width of the cassette 4 in terms of paper size. (100-V model only) WIDTH-MF Indicates the paper width of the manual feeder in terms of paper size. 5-10 T COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>DISPLAY Indicates jam data.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>DISPLAY FF: Types of Jams Code 00xx 01xx 02xx 0Axx 0Bxx G: Source of Paper Type none delay jam stationary jam stationary jam at power-on front cover open jam T05-201-01 ff: Jam Sensor Code xx01 xx02 xx03 xx04 xx05 xx06 xx07 xx08 xx0B xx0C xx0D xx0E xx0F xx10 xx11 xx12 xx13 xx14 xx15 xx16 xx1E xx1F xx32 xx33 xx34 xx35 xx36 xx37 Sensor registration paper sensor (PS29) laser write start sensor (PS28) vertical path 1 paper sensor (PS24) vertical path 2 paper sensor (PS25) ver
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>DISPLAY Indicates error data. < ERR > < 1/7 > < READY > AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G F05-201-03 Item AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE Description Indicates the numbers of errors (the higher the number, the more recent the error).
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>DISPLAY Indicates the measurements taken of the voltage/current system. PRIMARY Indicates the level of primary charging current. PRE-TR Indicates the level of current for pre-transfer (post) charging. TR Indicates the level of transfer charging current. SP Indicates the level of separation charging current. BIAS Indicates the level of developing bias DC. SP-N2 Indicates the level of separation charging current for the 2nd side of a double-sided print.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>DISPLAY Indicates the photosensitive drum surface potential control data. DPOT-K Indicates the surface potential of the photosensitive drum. (unit: V) VL1T Indicates the target value of the light-area potential (VL1) for copying. VL1M Indicates the measurement taken of the light-area potential (VL1) for copying. (optimum value: VL1T ± 6 V; reference only) VL2M Indicates the measurement taken of the light-area potential (VL2) for copying.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE PLMT-P Indicates the primary charging current control mechanism for printer (PDL) images. (0: normal, 1: error) LLMT Indicates the laser power voltage control mechanism for copying. (0: normal, 1: error) PLMT Indicates the primary charging current control mechanism for copying. (0: normal, 1: error) BIAS-P Indicates the result of potential control for the developing bias for copying. BIAS-C Indicates the result of potential control for the developing bias for copying.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE Indicates alarm data. < 1/1 > < ALRM-1 > BODY 00 DF 00 SORTER ww xx yy zz PREV < READY > NEXT F05-201-04 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE Item BODY Description Indicates alarms associated with the copying machine. DF Indicates alarms associated with the ADF. SORTER Indicates the alarms associated with the finisher.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE FEEDER>DISPLAY 2.2 FEEDER FEEDSIZE Indicates the size of an original detected by the ADF. COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE 3. I/O (I/O display mode) The following screen appears in response to COPIER>I/O; for the items, see the pages that follow: Input/output port of DC controller PCB DC-CON R-CON Input/output port of reader controller PCB Input/output port of ADF controller PCB FEEDER SORTER Input/output port of finisher controller PCB Input/output port of main controller PCB MN-CON F05-300-01 P001 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx bit 0 bit 15 address 5-20 T COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>I/O 3.1 DC-CON Indicates the input/output ports of the DC controller PCB.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>I/O Address IO-P04 IO-P05 5-22 T Bit 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Notation PS10 PS12 PS17 PS18 SV1 SV1 CL2 PS5 PS9 PS3 SW2 PS15 PS16 SV2 SV2 TH2 TH1 RL1 FM1 FM2 FM6 FM3 FM7 FM4 FM8 FM5 PS47 Description left deck lifter sensor signal left deck limit sensor signal cassette 3 lifter sensor signal cassette 4 lifter sensor signal cassette 4 universal detection cassette 4 length detection signal 0 cas
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>I/O Address IO-P06 IO-P07 Bit 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 Notation Description left deck paper level sensor (upper) signal PS49 SSR error signal not used right deck paper level sensor (lower) signal PS48 left deck paper level sensor (lower ) signal PS50 not used PS104/ shift tray full sensor signal 105 fixing motor clock detection M19 laser scanner motor lock detection signal M15 delivery jam sensor signal PS46 for factory a
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>I/O Address IO-P08 IO-P09 IO-P10 5-24 T Bit 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 Notation Description high-voltage transfer error signal high-voltage primary error signal not used CL1 developing clutch drive signal CL2 registration roller clutch drive signal CL3 manual feed pickup clutch drive signal not used not used not used left deck pull-off clutch drive signal CL4 not used roller bias ON signal de
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>I/O Address Bit 3 4 5 IO-P11 IO-P12 IO-P13 IO-P14 IO-P15 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 Notation Description M6 primary charging wire cleaning motor (CW) signal pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor (CW) M7 signal pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor M7 (CCW) signal transfer/separation charging wire cleaning motor (CW) signal M8 M8 transfer/separation charging wire cleaning motor (CCW) signal M1 drum motor
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>I/O Address IO-P16 IO-P17 IO-P18 IO-P19 5-26 T Bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Notation LA1 VS1 FM8 M14 M29 Description not used not used not used not used pre-exposure LED ON signal potential sensor ON signal fixing 12 V supply signal DDI-PPRDY DDI-CTS not used not used not used not used not used not used DDI-CPRDY DDI-PRSST DDI-RST not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>I/O Address IO-P20 IO-P21 IO-P22 IO-P23 IO-P24 Bit 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 Notation Description M13 delivery motor clock signal CL2 registration roller clutch ON signal not used not used not used not used pre-registration motor clock signal M17 not used M18 duplexing feed right motor clock signal serial 0-TXD serial 1-TXD serial 0-RXD serial 1-RXD not used not used not used not used cassette paper width i
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>I/O Address IO-P25 IO-P26 IO-P27 IO-P28 5-28 T Bit 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Notation SW101 PS102 PS103 PS101 PS106 CL102 PS107 PS108 SW102 PS105 PS109 LED100 SL101 CL102 M101 M102 SW102 SL102 M101 Description pulse count INT DMA-END-INT DMA-REQ-INT deck open detection switch signal deck paper absent sensor signal deck lifter upper limit sensor signal deck pickup sensor signal deck feed sensor signal deck pi
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>I/O 3.2 R-CON Indicates the input/output ports of the reader controller PCB.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>I/O Address IO-P7 IO-P8 IO-P9 IO-P10 5-30 T Bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 0-7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Notation LA2 PS39 PS40 PS40 M3 M3 M3 M3 M3 M3 M3 M3 M3 M3 M3 Description PCB check mode (for factory) scanning lamp (LOW/HI) switch signal CS output to EEPROM scanner HP sensor signal ADF-ITOP (image leading edge) signal copyboard cover sensor (used as interrupt) copyboard cover sensor WATCH-DOG pulse output output to analog processor DO signal from EE
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>I/O 3.3 MN-CON Indicates the input/output ports of the main controller PCB.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>I/O Address P008 5-32 T Bit 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Notation IPCPA Description delivery count pickup count serial EEPROM DIN serial EEPROM SCK serial EEPROM CS PCI (PDL) soft reset not used SPO[2] flash ROM write protect battery charge control board version board version board version BWUI detect Color UI detect FAX SSB identification FAX SSB identification FAX SSB identification Remarks 1: counter 1: counter access port to EEPROM access port
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>I/O 3.4 FEEDER Indicates the input/output ports of the ADF controller PCB.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>I/O Address IO-P06 IO-P07 IO-P08 IO-P09 IO-P10 5-34 T Bit 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 Notation FM1 FM1 S3 PI1 S2 S1 SW1 PI2 M3 2 M3 3 M3 4 M3 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 M2 M2 M2 Description D/A load signal not used not used not used not used EEPROM data input cooling fan lock signal cooling fan not used post-separation sensor signal registration 1 sensor signal read sensor signal delivery reversal sensor signal not used not used
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>I/O Address IO-P11 AD-P01 AD-P02 AD-P03 AD-P04 AD-P05 AD-P06 AD-P07 AD-P08 DA-P01 DA-P02 DA-P03 DA-P04 DA-P05 DA-P06 DA-P07 DA-P08 DA-P09 DA-P10 DA-P11 DA-P12 Bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Notation LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 VR1 S3 S2 S1 M1 M2 M3 S3 S3 S2 S2 S1 S1 Description not used not used not used not used not used not used not used LED ON signal LED ON signal LED ON signal LED ON signal not used not used not used not used tray volume post-separation s
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE 3.5 SORTER Indicates the input/output ports of the finisher controller PCB. 3.5.1 Finisher Block Address IO-P01 (output) IO-P02 (output) IO-P03 (output) IO-P04 (input) 5-36 T Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 Notation M8 M8 M4 M4 M3 M3 M5 M2 M7 M1P M2P M2P M5 M5 LED2 PS1 LED1 Description not used not used No. 2 feed motor phase A output No.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE Address IO-P05 (output) IO-P06 (input) IO-P07 (input) IO-P08 (output) IO-P09 (input) Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 Notation Description inlet feed motor phase A output M9 inlet feed motor phase B output M9 not used not used not used not used not used not used not used stapler tray paper detection signal PI4 punch motor clock detection signal No. 1 feed motor phase A (output) M1 No.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE Address IO-P10 IO-P11 IO-P12 (input) IO-P13 IO-P14 (input) IO-P15 (input) IO-P16 (input) 5-38 T Bit 6 7 8-15 0-15 0-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 0-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 Notation MS7 MS8 PI11 PI12 PI3P PI1P MS2P MS1P Description not used not used not used not used not used stapler connection detection signal stapler cartridge detection staple ready signal staple absent detection signal not used tray 1 paper detection signal tray 2 paper
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE Address IO-P17 (input) IO-P18 (output) IO-P19 (output) IO-P20 (output) Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 Notation Description joint detection signal PI15 cover open/closed detection signal PI16 saddle unit connection detection signal tray upper limit detecting switch signal MS5 tray safety switch signal MS.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE Address IO-P21 (output) IO-P22 AD-P01 AD-P02 AD-P03 AD-P04 AD-P05 AD-P06 AD-P07 DA-P01 5-40 T Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 0-15 - Notation Description belt escape solenoid drive signal SL7 buffer outlet solenoid drive signal SL3 not used buffer inlet solenoid drive signal SL2 flapper solenoid drive signal SL1 paddle solenoid drive signal SL5 solenoid timer output escape solenoid drive signal SL6 not used not used dust full detection signal 24-V output OFF detection signal horizontal
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE 3.5.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE Address IO-P27 (input) IO-P28 (output) IO-P29 (output) IO-P30 (input) IO-P31 (input) 5-42 T Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 Notation PI7S PI16S SW2 PI17S PI12S PI13S M4S M4S M8S M1S M1S M8S M5S M5S M2S M8S M3S M3S M3S M5S PI19S PI20S MS5S MS7S PI8S PI6S PI18S PI5S PI14S PI3S PI2S PI21S PI21S Description paper positioning HP detection signal stitcher IN detection signal PUSH SW2 ON/OFF vertical path paper de
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE Address IO-P32 IO-P33 (input) IO-P34 (input) AD-P09 AD-P10 AD-P11 AD-P12 AD-P13 AD-P14 AD-P15 AD-P16 Bit 6 7 8-15 0-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 - Notation MS4S MS6S MS1S MS2S PI3S PI2S PI9S MS3S PI9 PI13 PI16 PI15 Description not used not used not used not used staple absent detection signal 2 staple absent detection signal 1 inlet cover open detecting switch signal front cover open detecting switch signal delivery cover open detecting signal front cover open
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE 4. ADJUST (adjustment mode) 4.1 COPIER The following screen appears in response to COPIER>ADJUST; for the items, see the pages that follow: BLANK AE V-CONT ADJ-XY FEED-ADJ CCD LASER HV-PRI CST-ADJ HV-TR DEVELOP HV-SP MISC DENS F05-401-01 5-44 T COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>ADJUST Executing AE Adjustment If you have cleared the RAM on the reader controller PCB, enter the settings indicated on the service label. AE-TBL Range of adjustment Use it to adjust the density of characters for image density adjustment. 1 to 9 Default: 5 Copy density White White Original density A higher setting increases text density. A lower setting decreases text density. F05-401-02 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>ADJUST Executing Image Read Start Position Adjustment If you have cleared the RAM on the reader controller PCB, enter the settings indicated on the service label. ADJ-X Range of adjustment Caution Use it to adjust the scanner image leading edge position. 250 to 290 (A change of ‘1’ causes a shift of 0.1 mm.) Be sure to execute this mode before adjusting the margin. Do not use this mode to create a margin.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>ADJUST ADJ-S Range of adjustment Caution Use it to adjust the scanner home position. 55 to 70 (A change of ‘1’ causes a shift of 0.1 mm.) • • Execute this mode if the copyboard glass is soiled so that the standard white plate will be read avoiding the soiled area. If you changed the adjustment value, be sure to open and then close the ADF (for HP search).
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>ADJUST Making CCD- and Shading-Related Adjustments If faulty images are noted after executing COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ, enter the settings indicated on the service label. SH-TRGT Use it to enter the white level target value for shading correction. SH-RATIO Use it to enter the data on the white label ratio (standard white paper and standard white plate) for shading correction.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>ADJUST Adjusting the Developing Bias Output BIAS Range of adjustment Caution Use it to enter the adjustment value for the development bias. 0 to 600 (A higher setting makes images lighter.) • • If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB, enter the settings indicated on the service label. This mode is valid only when the potential control mechanism is disabled.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>ADJUST Making Fine Adjustments for Copy Density Auto Correction If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB, enter the settings indicated on the service label. DENS-ADJ Range of adjustment Use it to correct the density of images (copier/printer). If images are foggy or high-density areas are faint, correct the F-value table.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>ADJUST Adjusting the Potential Control System • Normally, the machine’s potential control is not executed if the temperature of the fixing assembly is 150°C or higher. If you have adjusted any of the following potential control-related modes, be sure to execute potential control by making the following selections: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PO-CNT-S. • If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB, enter the settings indicated on the service label.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>ADJUST Adjusting the Output of the Primary Charging Assembly If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB, enter the settings indicated on the service label. PRIMARY Range of adjustment Use it to enter the adjustment value of the primary current for non-potential control.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>ADJUST H-PRE-TR Caution Use it to enter the offset value for the pre-transfer high-voltage output of the DC controller PCB. If you have replaced the DC controller PCB or cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB, enter the settings indicated on the label attached to the new DC controller PCB. D-PRE-TR Caution Use it to enter the offset value for the pre-transfer high-voltage output of the DC controller PCB.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>ADJUST D-HV-SP Use it to enter the offset value for the separation high-voltage output of the DC controller PCB. If you have replaced the DC controller PCB or cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB, enter the settings indicated on the label attached to the new DC controller PCB. Caution Adjusting the Feeder System REGIST Range of adjustment Caution Use it to adjust the timing at which the registration roller clutch turns on.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>ADJUST Making Cassette-/Manual Feed-Related Adjustments If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB, enter the settings indicated on the service label. C3-STMTR Caution Enter the paper width basic value (STMTR) for the cassette 3. If you have replaced the paper width detecting VR, execute FUNCTION>CST in service mode. C3-A4R Caution Use it to enter the paper width basic value (A4R) for the cassette 3.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>ADJUST C4-LVOL Use it to enter the stacking capacity of the cassette 4 (50 sheets). C4-HVOL Use it to enter the stacking capacity of the cassette 4 (275 sheets). Making Other Adjustments If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB, enter the settings indicated on the service label. ATM Range of adjustment 5-56 T Use it to select an operating environment in relation to atmospheric pressure.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>ADJUST 4.2 FEEDER DOCST Range of adjustment Use it to adjust the original leading edge registration when the ADF is selected as the source of paper. • A higher setting decreases the leading edge margin. • The data will be stored on the ADF controller PCB. -10 to +10 (unit: 0.5 mm) Using the Mode 1) Make a print of the test chart, and check the position of the image. 2) Select the mode item, and change the setting to make adjustments. 3) Press the OK key.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE SORTER>ADJUST 4.3 SORTER PNCH-HLE Range of adjustment Use it to adjust the position of the punch holes (paper feeding direction) when the puncher unit is used. • A higher setting moves the punch holes toward the leading edge (middle) of the sheet. -4 to +2 (unit; mm) Using the Mode 1) Make a print of the Test Chart, and check the position of the holes. 2) Select this item, and change the setting as needed. 3) Press the OK key.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE 5. FUNCTION (operation/inspection mode) 5.1 COPIER The following screen appears in response to COPIER>FUNCTION; for the items, see the pages that follow: INSTALL FIXING CCD PANEL LASER PART-CHK SYSTEM CLEAR MISC-R DPC MISC-P CST HRD-DISK CLEANING SENS-ADJ F05-501-01 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>FUNCTION Modes for Installation TONER-S Use it to supply toner from the hopper to the developing assembly and to stir the toner inside the developing assembly. • Make sure that the developing assembly is properly mounted before pressing the OK key. • Do NOT turn off the power while the machine is in operation. Using the Mode 1) Select the mode item, and press the OK key. 2) The machine executes toner supply.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>FUNCTION Executing Auto Adjustment for CCD-/Shading-Related Items CCD-ADJ Caution Use it to execute CCD auto adjustment. • Execute this mode if you have replaced the CCD unit, scanning lamp, inverter PCB, or copyboard glass (standard white plate). • Use the whitest of all papers used by the user as the standard white paper. Using the Mode 1) Place sheets of standard white paper (10 sheets min.) on the copyboard glass. 2) Select the mode item, and press the OK key.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>FUNCTION SHDG-POS Use it to enter the data for optimum position auto adjustment in reference to the standard white plate for shading correction. Do not use this mode item. It is for use at the factory only. Caution SH-PS-ST Use it to execute optimum position auto adjustment in reference to the standard white plate for shading correction. The following must be executed before initiating auto adjustment in this mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-DJ.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>FUNCTION 5) When the following has been updated, enter the new settings: COPIER>ADJUST>CCD-EGGN-ST and -EGGN-END. Edge gain correction plate Copyboard glass Reading glass (front) F05-501-03 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>FUNCTION Using Laser-Related Operations POWER Turning On the Laser Using the Mode 1) Select the mode item, and press the OK key. • The laser turns on. • The laser turns off automatically in 30 sec. (To turn it off earlier, press the Stop key.) Using Potential Sensor-Related Operations DPC Caution Use it to force potential control.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>FUNCTION Executing Size Auto Adjustment for the Cassette/Manual Feed Tray C3-STMTR C3-A4R C4-STMTR C4-A4R Caution Use it to store the paper width basic value for the cassette 3/4. STMTR width: 139.5 mm, A4R width: 210 mm For fine adjustment after storing the basic value, make the following selections: ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C3-STMTR, C3-A4R, C4-STMTR, C4-A4R. Using the Mode 1) Place STMTR paper in the cassette, and adjust the side guide plate to suit the STMTR width.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>FUNCTION Executing Cleaning Operations WIRE0-CLN Use it to execute automatic cleaning of the charging wire five times (5 round trips) consecutively. If you have replaced the primary charging wire or the transfer charging wire, execute this mode item. Using the Mode 1) Select the mode item, and press the OK key. • The machine executes auto cleaning of the charging wire five times consecutively.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>FUNCTION Checking the Control Panel LCD-CHK Use it to check for missing dots on the touch panel. Using the Mode 1) Select the mode item, and press the OK key. • The entire face of the touch panel turns on in white and blue repeatedly. 2) Press the Stop key to stop the operation. LED-CHK Use it to check the LEDs on the control panel. Using the Mode 1) Select the mode item, and press the OK key. • The LEDs will turn on in sequence.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>FUNCTION Key Screen display counter check copy scan 0 to 9 stop ID additional functions BILL COPY OTHER 0-9 STOP ID USER Key Screen display start mail box reset energy saver clear interrupt guide START PB RESET STAND BY CLEAR INTERRUPT ? T05-501-01 Checking the operation of various loads. CL Use it to select the clutch to check. Using the Mode 1) Select the mode item.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>FUNCTION MTR Use it to select the motor to check. Using the Mode 1) Select the mode item. 2) Using the keypad, enter the code of the motor to check (T05-501-03). 3) Press the OK key. MTR-ON Use it to check the operation of the motor. Using the Mode 1) Select the mode item, and press the OK key. • ON for 20 secs → OFF • The hopper motor and the duplex horizontal registration motor remains on for 10 sec and then turns off.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>FUNCTION Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Name drum motor (M1) main motor (M2) fixing motor (M19) laser scanner motor (M15) hopper stirring motor (M9) hopper supply motor (M10) duplexing horizontal registration motor (M16) right deck lifter motor (M5) left deck lifter motor (M4) cassette 3 lifter motor (M20) cassette 4 lifter motor (M21) right deck pickup motor (M11) Code 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Name left deck pickup motor (M24) cassette 3/4 pi
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>FUNCTION Cleaning the RAM, Jam History, and Error Code History The data is cleared only when the main power switch has been turned off and then on; be sure to turn it off and then on at the end. ERR Use it to clear error codes. Using the Mode 1) Select the mode item, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch. DC-CON Use it to clear the RAM on the DC controller PCB. Using the Mode 1) Select the mode item, and press the OK key.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>FUNCTION PWD-CLR Use it to clear the password set for ‘system administrator’ in user mode. Using the Mode 1) Select the mode item, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch. CNT-MCON Use it to clear the counter for servicing located on the main controller PCB. Using the Mode 1) Select the mode item, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power switch. CNT-DCON Use it to clear the counter for servicing found on the DC controller PCB.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>FUNCTION KEY-HIST Use it to print out the history of key inputs made on the control panel. Using the Mode 1) Select the mode item, and press the OK key. • The machine will print out the history of key inputs. HIST-PRT Use it to print out the history of jams and errors in service mode. Using the Mode 1) Select the item mode, and press the OK key. • The machine will print out the history of jams and errors. USER-PRT Use it to print out a list of user modes in service mode.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>FUNCTION Use it to check the operation of sensors. STCK-LMT Use it to adjust the position of the full sensor (PS104, PS105) of the shift tray. • If either of the full sensors (or both) detects paper, the machine will indicate ‘ON’. • If neither of the sensors detects paper, the machine will indicate ‘OFF’. • Use this mode when the full sensor has been replaced.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>FUNCTION 5.2 FEEDER SENS-INT Caution Use it to adjust the sensitivity of each sensor of the ADF. Be sure to clean the sensor before executing this mode. Using the Mode 1) Select the mode item, and press the OK key. • The machine stops operation at the end of the adjustment. COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE 6. OPTION (settings mode) 6.1 COPIER The following screen appears in response to COPIER>OPTION; for the items, see the pages that follow: BODY USER CST ACC TEMPO F05-601-01 5-76 T COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>OPTION BODY Use it to make machine settings. PO-CNT Settings Use it to turn on/off potential control. 0: off, 1: on (default) PO-CNTMD Settings Use it to select a potential control mode. 0: one at time of power-up (default) 1: 10 mins and 60 mins after power-up (reduced mode) 2: 10 mins and 60 mins after power-up (normal mode) W-CLN-P Settings Use it to set the intervals at which auto cleaning of the primary charging wire is executed in terms of the number of prints.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>OPTION FUZZY Use it to turn on/off fuzzy control and to make environment settings. • The selection will affect pre-transfer, transfer, and separation charging currents. • Selecting 1 through 3 will make the operation independent of the environment sensor.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>OPTION CONFIG Settings Use it to select multiple pieces of firmware retained on the hard disk so as to make appropriate settings: country, language, model, paper size series. XXYYZZAA XX: country (JP), YY: language (ja), ZZ (00); model, AA (00): paper size series; display will be in the following sequence and the parentheses indicate default settings: COPIER>DISPLAY>USER>LANGUAGE. Using the Mode 1) Select CONFIG.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>OPTION COTDPC-D For factory use. 0 to 3 (default: 0) Settings EVL-VDT Use it to switch the drum target potential (VDT) and the developing bias (Vdc) to reduce traces of black fixing separation claws caused by an excess deposit of toner in a low-humidity environment.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>OPTION TR-SP-C3 Settings Use it to switch the transfer/separation output level when the cassette 3 is used as the source of paper to prevent various problems. 0: normal (default), 1: to prevent re-transfer 2; to prevent separation fault, 3: to prevent transfer fault TR-SP-C4 Settings Use it to switch the transfer/separation output level when the cassette 4 is used as the source of paper to prevent various problems.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>OPTION SLEEP Use it to turn on/off sleep mode. 0: OFF, 1: ON (default) Settings WEB-DISP Use it to turn on/off the fixing web length warning. • If OFF (no warning), the message will appear only when service mode is started. 0: OFF (warning not issued; default ), 1: ON (warning issued) Settings SIZE-DET Use it to turn on/off the original size detection mechanism. 0: OFF, 1: ON (default) After making the setting, be sure to turn off and then on the main power switch.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>OPTION COUNTER5 Settings Use it to change the type of soft counter 5 of the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. 000 to 804 (T05-601-01; default, 000) COUNTER6 Settings Use it to change the type of soft counter 6 of the control panel to suit the needs of the user or the dealer. 000 to 804 (T05-601-01; default: 000) DATE-DSP Caution Settings Use it to switch how the date is displayed. For the 120V model, the default is ‘1’.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>OPTION CNT-DISP Use it to enable/disable the indication of a serial number in response to the Counter Check key. 0: enable indication (default), 1: disable indication Settings PH-D-EL Use it to select the number of lines for photo mode printing. 0: 141 lines (default), 1: 134 lines Settings COPY-JOB Settings Use it to prevent auto copy start when a coin robot and a card reader.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE The soft counters are classified as follows according to input numbers: 100s: total 500s: scan 200s: copies 600s: box 300s: prints 700: reception prints 400s: copies + prints 800: report prints Legend : counter effective for the machine 4C: full color mono: mono color (Y, M, C/R, G, B/sepia mono) Bk: black mono L: large size (larger than B4) S: small size (B4 or smaller) number in counter: count indicating large-size sheets In service mode, the settings
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE Effective No.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE Effective No. 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 Counter type Bk scan (total 1) copy scan (Bk) Bk scan (total 2) Bk scan (L) copy scan (Bk/L) Bk scan (S) copy scan (Bk/S) color scan (total 1) copy scan (4C) color scan (total 2) color scan (L) copy scan (4C/L) color scan (S) copy scan (4C/S) copy scan (L) copy scan (S) copy scan (total) Effective No.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>OPTION CST Making Cassette-Related Settings U1-NAME U2-NAME U3-NAME U4-NAME Settings Use it to turn on/off the paper name indication when a paper size group (U1 to U4) is detected. 0: OFF (touch panel indicates ‘U1’ through ‘U4’; default) 1: ON (indicates paper name specified in CST-U1 through -U4) CST-U1 Settings Use it to specify paper names used for paper size group U1.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>OPTION C1-DWSW C2-DWSW DK-DWSW C3-DWSW C4-DWSW Setting Use it to turn on/off the thick paper control sequence.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>OPTION ACC Use it to make accessories-related settings. COIN Use it to turn on/off the coin vendor indication. • The control card indicator used on the control panel may be used for the coin vendor. 0: OFF (default), 1: ON (for count vendor) Settings DK-P Use it to set a paper of the paper deck. After electing the appropriate paper size, be sure to turn off and then on the main power switch.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>OPTION F-HUM-D Settings Use it to enter an approximate humidity level of the site of installation. • Uses the input humidity as the output of the humidity sensor. • Valid only if F-HUM-SW is set to '1'. 30% to 99% (default: 35%) COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE FEEDER>OPTION 6.2 FEEDER SIZE-SW Settings Use it to turn on/off the mixed size detection mechanism for AB and Inch series originals. 0: disable (default), 1: enable 6.3 SORTER BLNK-SW Settings Use it to set the margin width (W) on both sides of the fold when the saddle stitcher is used. 0: normal width (5 mm), 1: larger width (10 mm; default) W F05-603-01 5-92 T COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE BOARD>OPTION 6.4 BOARD MENU-1 Settings Use it to enable level 1 indication for the printer settings menu. 0: disable indication (default), 1: enable indication MENU-2 Settings Use it to enable level 2 indication for the printer settings menu. 0: disable indication (default), 1: enable indication MENU-3 Settings Use it to enable level 3 indication of the printer settings menu.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE 7. TEST (test print mode) The following screen appears in response to COPIER>TEST; for the items, see the pages that follow: PG NETWORK F05-701-01 5-94 T COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>TEST PG Use it to select the type of test print and generate it. TYPE Enter the type number of the test print, and press the OK key to generate it. Be user to return the input to ‘00’ after generating the test print. 00: normal print, 01 through 08: see T05-701-01 Caution Settings TXPH Use it to switch between text mode and photo mode during test printing. 0: text mode, 1: photo mode Settings PG_PICK Settings Use it to select the source of paper for test printing.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>TEST NETWORK Use it to check the connections related to the network. PING Caution Use it to check the connection between the machine and the network (for TCP/IP environment only). Use this mode to check the connection to the network after installing the machine or when the connection to the network is found to be poor. < 1/1 > 0. PING 0. 0.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>TEST 6) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING; then, enter the loop back address* (127.0.0.1), and press the OK key and then the Start key. • If ‘NG’ is indicated, the machine has a problem with the TCP/IP set tings; go back to step 3), and check the settings. • If ‘OK’ is indicated, the machine’s TCP/IP settings may be considered to be free of a problem.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE 8. COUNTER (counter mode) The following screen appears in response to COPIER>COUNTER; for the items, see the pages that follow: TOTAL TOTAL PICK-UP PICK-UP PRDC-1 FEEDE FEEDER JAM DRBL-1 MISC DRBL-2 F05-801-01 1) Select the item to clear (to highlight). 2) Press the Clear key on the control panel. • The counter will be cleared, and will return to ‘00000000’.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>COUNTER The machine is equipped with consumables counters (PRDC-1, DRBL-1, DRBL-2), providing references for parts replaced on a periodical basis or parts requiring replacement. EX. PRM-WIRE [1] / 00000027 / [2] 00500000 / [3] 0% !! 000082 [4] [5] [6] [1] Indicates the name of the part. In the case of the example, the primary charging wire.
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>COUNTER Level 2: PICK-UP Level 3: C1 C2 C3 C4 MF DK 2-SIDE Level 2: FEEDER Level 3: FEED Level 2: JAM Level 3: TOTAL FEEDER SORTER 2-SIDE MF C1 C2 C3 C4 DK Level 2: MISC Level 3: FIX-WEB* WST-TNR right front deck (cassette 1) pickup counter left front deck (cassette 2) pickup counter cassette 3 pickup counter cassette 4 pickup counter manual feed tray pickup counter paper deck pickup counter duplexing 2nd side pickup counter feeder pickup total counter machine total jam count
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>COUNTER level 2: DRBL-1 Level 3: PRM-UNIT PO-UNIT PO-SCRPR T/S-UNIT CLN-BLD SP-CLAW DVG-CYL DVG-ROLL C3-PU-RL C3-SP-RL C3-FD-RL C4-PU-RL C4-SP-RL C4-FD-RL LD-PU-RL LD-SP-RL LD-FD-RL RD-SP-RL RD-PU-RL RD-FD-RL M-SP-RL M-FD-RL M-PO-RL FX-UP-RL FX-LW-RL FX-IN-BS FX-WEB* DLV-UCLW DLV-LCLW primary charging assembly counter pre-transfer charging assembly counter pre-transfer (post-) charging assembly scraper counter transfer/separation charging assembly counter cleaner blade counte
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE MODE COPIER>COUNTER Level 2: DRBL-2 Level 3: DF-PU-RL DF-SP-PL DF-SP-PD DF-FD-RL LNT-TAPE PD-PU-RL PD-SP-RL PD-FD-RL FIN-STPR FIN-FDBL FIN-PDDL SDL-STPL PUNCH PNCH-HRS 5-102 T ADF pickup roller counter ADF separation plate counter ADF separation pad counter ADF feed roller counter ADF dust-collecting tape counter paper deck pickup roller counter paper deck separation roller counter paper deck feed roller counter finisher stapler counter finisher feed belt counter finisher paddol counter
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS 1. Error Codes 1.1 List of Error Codes The machine is equipped with a mechanism to run self diagnosis to find out its condition (particularly of its sensors): CPU on the main controller PCB and the CPU on the DC controller PCB. If it finds a fault, it indicates the nature of the fault in its control panel. The following is a list of codes and descriptions (including timing of detection); a code may have detailed codes, which may be checked in service mode (COPIER> DISPLAY>JAM/ERR).
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS E002 Main Cause The main thermistor (TH1) has poor contact or an open circuit. The thermal switch (TP1) has an open circuit. The SSR is faulty. The DC controller is faulty. Mode of Detection Caution 0000 The temperature of the upper fixing roller does not reach 100°C within 2 min after it has exceeded 70°C. The error must be reset in service mode (COPIER>FUNCTION> CLEAR>ERR). E003 Main Cause The main thermistor (TH1) has poor contact or an open circuit.
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS E010 Main Cause Mode of Detection The main motor (M2) is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. 0000 The clock pulses do not arrive for 2 secs or more after the main motor drive signal (MMFG) has been generated. E012 Main Cause Mode of Detection The drum motor (M1) is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. 0000 The clock pulses do not arrive for 2 secs or more after the drum motor drive signal (DMFG) has been generated.
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS E032 Main Cause The copy data controller or the remote diagnostic device is faulty. The Main controller PCB is faulty. Mode of Detection 0001 Although once connected, the copy data controller or the remote diagnostic device has become disconnected. E061 Main Cause The laser shutter is faulty. The laser unit is faulty. The potential measurement PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty.
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS E110 Main Cause The laser scanner motor (M15) is faulty. The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The DC controller PCB is faulty. Mode of Detection 0001 • After the laser scanner motor drive signal has been generated, the motor ready signal (LMRDY*) does not arrive for 15 secs or more.
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS E202 Main Cause The scanner HP sensor (PS39) is faulty. The scanner motor (M3) is faulty. The reader controller PCB is faulty. Mode of Detection Caution 0001 The scanner HP sensor does not turn off even when the scanner has been moved 40 mm forward after the main power switch has been turned on or the Start key has been pressed. 0002 The scanner HP sensor does not turn on even when the scanner has been moved 450 mm in reverse. No code is indicated, and keys are locked.
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS E240 Main Cause Mode of Detection The main controller PCB. The DC controller PCB is faulty. 0000 An error has occurred in the communication between the main controller PCB and the CPU of the DC controller PCB. E243 Main Cause Mode of Detection The control panel CPU PCB is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty. 0000 An error has occurred in communication between the CPU of the control panel CPU PCB and the main controller PCB.
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS E601 Main Cause The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The hard disk drive is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty. Mode of Detection 0000 The main controller PCB has detected an error in control data while an image was transmitted between the main controller PCB and the hard disk drive. 0001 The main controller PCB has found an error in the control data in transfer of images between main controller PCB and the DC controller PCB.
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS E710 Main Cause The DC controller PCB is faulty. The reader controller PCB is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty. Mode of Detection 0001 When the main power is turned on, the IPC (IC5021) on the reader controller PCB cannot be initialized. 0002 When the main power is turned on, the IPC (IC120) on the DC controller PCB cannot be initialized. 0003 When the main power is turned on, the IPC (IC1003) on the main controller PCB cannot be initialized.
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS E713 Main Cause The connector is not connected properly. The finisher accessories power supply PCB is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. Mode of Detection 0000 The communications IC (IPC) on the finisher controller has gone out of order. E717 Main Cause The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The copy data controller or the remote diagnostic device is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty.
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS E740 Main cause Mode of Detection The LAN card is faulty. The main controller PCB is faulty. 0001 An error is detected on the LAN card at power-on (with the card inserted). 0002 A MAC address is found to be faulty. 0003 The LAN card register cannot be read. E741 Main Cause Mode of Detection The PCI bus connection is not proper. The main controller PCB is faulty. 0000 An error has occurred in the PCI bus. E742 Main Cause Mode of Detection The RIP1 board (accessory) is faulty.
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS E805 Main Cause The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit). The feed fan (FM1) is faulty. The heat discharge fan (FM3) is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. Mode of Detection 0001 While the heat discharge fan is being driven, the clock signal (FM3CLK) does not arrive for 5 secs or more. 0002 While the feed fan is being driven, the clock signal (FM1CLK) does not arrive for 5 secs or more. E824 Main Cause The wiring is faulty (short circuit, open circuit).
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS 1.2 Self Diagnosis of the ADF When the machine's self diagnosis mechanism has turned on, the condition can be reset by turning off and then on the host machine's power switch. If the machine must remain out of order, prints may still be made by disconnecting the machine's lattice connector, and placing an original on the host machine's copyboard glass. E412 Main Cause Mode of Detection The cooling fan (FM1) is faulty. The ADF controller PCB is faulty.
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS 1.3 Self Diagnosis of the Finisher E500 Main Cause Mode of Detection The finisher controller PCB is faulty. The DC controller PCB is faulty. 0001 The communication between the host machine and the finisher has been interrupted; this error is detected by the host machine. E503 Main Cause The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS E512 Main Cause The delivery motor clock sensor (PI10) is faulty. The delivery motor (M2) is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Mode of Detection 0001 When operation starts, as many clocks as needed do not arrive from the delivery motor clock sensor. 0002 No clock pulse arrives while paper is being moved over a distance of 200 mm. E530 Main Cause The alignment plate home position sensor (PI6) is faulty. The alignment motor (M3) is faulty.
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS E535 Main Cause The swing motor clock sensor (PI20) is faulty. The swing guide open sensor (PI18) is faulty. The safety area switch (MS3) is faulty. The swing guide closed detecting switch 2 (MS6) is faulty. The swing motor (M7) is faulty. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Mode of Detection 0001 The swing guide closed detecting switch 2 does not turn on when the swing motor has been rotated CCW for 1 sec.
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS E590 Main Cause The punch home position sensor (PI3P) is faulty. The punch motor (M1P) is faulty. The punch driver PCB is faulty. Mode of Detection 0001 The puncher does not leave home position when the punch motor has been driven for 200 msecs. 0002 The puncher does not return to home position when the punch motor has been driven for 200 msecs. E593 Main Cause The horizontal registration home position sensor (PI1P) is faulty. The horizontal registration motor (M1P) is faulty.
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS 1.4 Self Diagnosis of the Saddle Stitcher E5F0 Main Cause The paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7S) is faulty. The paper positioning plate motor (M4S) is faulty. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. Mode of Detection 0001 The paper positioning plate home position sensor does not turn on when the paper positioning plate motor has been driven for about 1.3 secs.
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS E5F3 Main Cause The alignment home position sensor (PI5S) is faulty. The alignment motor (M5S) is faulty. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. Mode of Detection 0001 The alignment plate home position sensor does not turn on when the alignment motor has been driven for 0.5 sec (initially, driven for about 1.7 sec). 0002 The alignment plate home position sensor does not turn off when the alignment motor has been driven for 1 sec.
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS E5F6 Main Cause The paper push-on plate motor clock sensor (PI1S) is faulty. The paper push-on plate leading edge position sensor (PI15S) is faulty. The paper push-on plate home position sensor (PI14S) is faulty. The paper push-on plate motor (M8S) is faulty. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. Mode of Detection 0001 The paper push-on plate home position sensor does not turn on when the paper push-on plate motor has been driven for 0.3 sec or more.
CHAPTER 6 SELF DIAGNOSIS E5F9 Main Cause The inlet door switch (MS1S) is faulty. The front door switch (MS2S) is faulty. The delivery door switch (MS3S) is faulty. The saddle stitch controller PCB is faulty. Mode of Detection 0001 When the inlet cover, front cover, and the delivery cover are found to be closed, the inlet door switch detects an open condition for 1 sec or more from the start of the initial rotation of the host machine or the start of printing.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
APPENDIX COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC. 2000 2000 2000 2000 CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.0 JULY 2000 Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
Download Free Service Manual at http://printer1.blogspot.
A.
General Timing Chart II · A4, 1 Sheet, Direct, Double-Sided; Right Deck Original placed Start key ON STBY Original separated/feed Original face read Original reversed Original back read Idle CCW/delivery Original set sensor (PI5) Post-separation sensor (S3) Registration 1 paper sensor (PS1) ADF Read sensor (S2) Delivery reversal sensor (S1) yyy ,,, ,,, yyy Pickup motor (M1) CW rotation CCW rotation Feed motor (M2) yy ,, ,, yy Delivery reversal motor (M3) Locking solenoid (SL2) yy ,, ,, yy
APPENDIX B. LIST OF SIGNALS/ABBREVIATIONS The following is a list of the signals and abbreviations used in this chapter and the circuit diagrams. REF. The abbreviations in parentheses are electrical signals, but are analog signals, which cannot be expressed in terms of ‘1’ or ‘0’. Others are digital signals, which may be expressed in terms of ‘1’ or ‘0’.
APPENDIX DMON DPDS DRUM MOTOR DRIVE command DUPLEXING PAPER DETECTION signal DRGFPD DUPLEXING PRE-REGISTRATION PAPER DETECTION signal DRUM HT ON DSJAM DRUM HEATER DRIVE CONTROL signal DERIVERY JAM DETECTION signal DSRGPD DTEP DUPLEXING SIDE REGISTRATION PAPER DETECTION signal DEVELOPER TONER signal EDS EXTERNAL DELIVERY signal FCBSD* FDOD FIXING WEB SOLENOID DRIVE command FRONT DOOR OPEN/CLOSE DETECTION signal FFUS* FM1CLK FIXING FEED UNIT LOCKED DETECTION signal FEEDING FAN CLOCK signal FM1O
APPENDIX LD-EN LDCLD* LASER ENABLE signal LEFT DECK PULL-OFF CLUTCH DRIVE command LDEL LEFT DECK LIMIT DETECTION signal LDEOP LDLM LEFT DECK OPEN/CLOSED DETECTION signal LEFT DECK LIFTER MOTOR DRIVE command LDLTP LDPD LEFT DECK LIFTER POSITION DETECTION signal LEFT DECK PAPER DETECTION signal LDPD1 LEFT DECK PAPER LEVEL DETECTION signal1 LDPD2 LDPFS LEFT DECK PAPER LEVEL DETECTION signal2 LEFT DECK FEED PAPER DETECTION signal LDPUSD* LDRT LEFT DECK PICK-UP SORENOID DRIVE command LEFT DECK RETR
APPENDIX M16_A* M16_B DUPLEXING HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION MOTOR (A*) DRIVE command DUPLEXING HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION MOTOR (B) DRIVE command M16_B* DUPLEXING HORIZONTAL REGISTRATION MOTOR (B*) DRIVE command M17_A M17_A* PRE-REGISTRATION MOTOR (A*) DRIVE command PRE-REGISTRATION MOTOR (A) DRIVE command M17_B M17_B* PRE-REGISTRATION MOTOR (B*) DRIVE command PRE-REGISTRATION MOTOR (B) DRIVE command M18_A* DUPLEXING FEEDING RIGHT MOTOR (A*) DRIVE command M18_A* M18_B DUPLEXING FEEDING RIGHT MOTOR (A)
APPENDIX M3B* M9ON SCANNER MOTOR (B*) DRIVE command HOPPER MOTOR (TONER STIRRING) DRIVE command MFDS MANUAL FEED TRAY OPEN/CLOSED DETECTION signal MFLSD* MFPCD* MULTI FEED RELEASING SORENOID DRIVE command MULTI FEED ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE command MFPD MFS MANUAL FEED PAPER WIDTH DETECTION MULTIFEEDER PAPER DETECTION signal MMFG MAIN MOTOR DRIVE CLOCK signal MMON PCLM1 MAIN MOTOR DRIVE command PRIMARY CHARGING WIRE CLEANING MOTOR1 DRIVE command PCLM2 PEXP PRIMARY CHARGING WIRE CLEANING MOTOR2 DRIV
APPENDIX RVFSD2* RVS1 REVERSING FLAPPER SORENOID DRIVE command REVERSING signal1 RVS2 REVERSING signal2 SL1P* SL1R* FIXING ASSEMBLY INLET GUIDE SOLENOID DRIVE command FIXING ASSEMBLY INLET GUIDE SOLENOID DRIVE command SP-CNT TEP SEPARATION CHARGING CURRENT CONTROL signal HOPPER TONER signal TH1 FIXING MAIN THERMISTOR signal TH2 THHUM1 FIXING SUB THERMISTOR signal MACHINE INSIDE HUMIDITY signal TR-CNT TR-LEAK-DETECT TRANSFER CHARGING CURRENT CONTROL signal TRANSFER CHARGING LEAKAGE DETECTION si
C.
D.
E.
APPENDIX F. List of Special Tools The following special tools will be needed in addition to the standard tools set: No. Name 1 Digital Toll No. FY9-2002 Shape Rank A multimeter Remarks Used when making electrical checks. 2 Door switch TKN-0093 A 3 Mirror FY9-3009 B positioning tool Used when positioning the No. 1/No. 2 mirror. (front, rear) 4 NA-3 Test Sheet FY9-9196 A Used when adjusting/ checking images.
APPENDIX No. Name 6 Environment Toll No. Shape FY9-3014 Rank B sensor checking Remarks Used to check the environment sensor. sensor 7 Tester extension FY9-3038 A pin 8 Tester extension pin (L-shaped) Used when making electrical checks. FY9-3039 A Used when making electrical checks. Rank: A: each service person is expected to carry one. B: each group of five persons is expected to carry one. C: each workshop is expected to carry one. A-14 COPYRIGHT © 2000 CANON INC.
APPENDIX G. List of Solvents/Oils No. Name 1 Alcohol Uses Cleaning: Composition Remarks Fluorescent family • Do not bring near fire. e.g., glass, plastic, hydrocarbon, • Procure locally. rubber parts; external covers. alcohol, surface activating agent, • Substitute: IPA (isopropyl alcohol) water 2 Solvent Fluorescent family • Do not bring near fire. metal part; oil, hydrocarbon, • Procure locally. toner. chlorine family Cleaning: hydrocarbon, alcohol.
Prepared by Office Imaging Products Technical Support Division Office Imaging Products Quality Assurance Center CANON INC. Printed in Japan REVISION 0 (JULY 2000) (18723/22109) 5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302-8501 Japan COPYRIGHT© 2000 CANON INC. CANON iR5000/iR6000 REV.
This publication is printed on 100% reprocessed paper. PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 0800M1.
